Yamaha PSR-E333 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: PSR-E333

Categoría: Teclados MIDI

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

YPT-330

Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard!

We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the

advanced and convenient functions of the instrument.

We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference.

Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 4–5.

Owner’s Manual

DIGITAL KEYBOARD

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON

PORTABLE KEYBOARDS

(NP, NPV, PSRE, YPG AND YPT SERIES)

Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free

performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every

Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the

Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s

authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted

Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or

Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions.

Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or

otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or

materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If

Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or

removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay

the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a)

damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to

follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the

carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been

altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d)

deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e)

damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/

noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of

alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original

Owner and is not transferable.

In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted

Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact

Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local

authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer

has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website

at www.Yamaha.com

. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of

the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase

document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found

ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon

receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment.

Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE

APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER

EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES.

YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT

YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE

EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION

MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to

state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to

assume for it any other express warranty.

If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact:

CUSTOMER SERVICE

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373

Telephone: 800-854-1569

www.yamaha.com

Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA.

(US only)

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter).

DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other

than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically

recommended by Yamaha.

WARNING:

Do not place this product in a position where anyone could

walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any

kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an

extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG.

NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling

capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a

cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is

used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-

pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at

the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or

modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update

existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and

headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels

that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long

periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfort-

able. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you

should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory

mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as

optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer

assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and

any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE

using.

Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other

uses are recommended.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are

not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the

owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi-

ronmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keep-

ing with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be

aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of bat-

tery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary,

contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these

may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a

rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being

charged.

When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and

never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed cor-

rectly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and

battery case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all bat-

teries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of

household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some rea-

son its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all

local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod-

ucts that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable

to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model

number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this

plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the

date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual

as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-BP (bottom)

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-

circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it,

or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything

over it.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage

is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Use the specified adaptor (page 68) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in

damage to the instrument or overheating.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument

or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it

should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it

inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any

openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power

immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the

instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit.

A burning item may fall over and cause a fire.

• Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together

with old ones.

• Do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or

batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same

maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage.

• Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries.

• Do not dispose of batteries in fire.

• Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.

• Keep batteries away from children.

• If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid

should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with

water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss

of sight or chemical burns.

• Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity

markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid

leakage.

• When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time,

remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery

fluid.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch

and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries,

remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by

Yamaha service personnel.

• The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

• It emits unusual smells or smoke.

• Some object has been dropped into the instrument.

• There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the

instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector.

Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the

outlet.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the

plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for

extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally

fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily

accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power

switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is

turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When

you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord

from the wall AC outlet.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack,

use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal

components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the

power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components,

set all volume levels to minimum.

• Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and

gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired

listening level.

• Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument.

• Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or

keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the

instrument or other property, or operational failure.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not

use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a

high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss.

If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

Battery

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/AC power adaptor

Location

Connections

Handling caution

DMI-3 1/2

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Even when the power switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make

sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

NOTICE

To avoid the possibility of malfunction/damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the

notices below.

 Handling and Maintenance

• Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio

may generate noise.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day)

to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° –

40°C, or 41° – 104°F.)

• Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

 Saving data

• Some data items (page 40) are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the power off. Saved data may be lost due to

malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external device such as a computer (page 45).

 About copyrights

• Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal

use.

• This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use

others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and

sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of

 About functions/data bundled with the instrument

• Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

 About this manual

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your

instrument.

• Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and other countries.

• Apple, Mac and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the

unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below

and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid

identification in the event of theft.

Model No.

Serial No.

(bottom)

DMI-3 2/2

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.

 Included Documents

Owner’s Manual (this book)

 Online Materials (Downloadable from the web)

The following instructional materials are available for downloading from the Yamaha website.

Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Access the Yamaha Manual Library, then enter your model name (PSR-E333, for example) in the Model Name

area to search the manuals.

MIDI Data Format

This document contains both the MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart.

MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

If you want to know more about MIDI and how to use it, refer to this introductory book.

Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete

the user registration at the above website.

Song book (only in English, French, German and Spanish)

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI

standard which ensures that any GM-compatible

music data can be accurately played by any GM-

compatible tone generator, regardless of manufac-

turer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and

hardware products that support GM System Level.

XGlite

As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified ver-

sion of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation

format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song

data using an XGlite tone generator. However,

keep in mind that some songs may play back dif-

ferently compared to the original data, due to the

reduced set of control parameters and effects.

STYLE FILE

The Style File Format combines all of

Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into

a single unified format.

USB

USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial

Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a

computer with peripheral devices. It allows

“hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices

while the power to the computer is on).

Touch Response

The exceptionally natural Touch Response fea-

ture, with a convenient front panel on/off

switch, gives you maximum expressive level

control over the voices.

• Owner’s manual (this book)

• Music rest

• AC Power Adaptor

* May not be included depending on your particular area.

Please check with your Yamaha dealer.

• My Yamaha Product User Registration

* The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when

you fill out the User Registration form.

About the Manuals

Formats and functions

Supplied Accessories Using the music rest

Insert the music

rest into the slots

as shown.

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Contents

About the Manuals................................................ 6

Formats and functions .......................................... 6

Supplied Accessories ........................................... 6

Using the music rest ............................................. 6

Introduction

Setting Up 8

Power Requirements ............................................ 8

Connecting headphones and external audio

equipment........................................................ 9

Connecting a footswitch ....................................... 9

Turn on the power ................................................ 9

Auto Power Off function........................................ 9

Removing the protective film ................................ 9

Panel Controls and Terminals 10

Basic Operation and Displays 12

Basic Operation.................................................. 12

Display................................................................ 13

Reference

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 14

Select and Play a Voice...................................... 14

Playing the Grand Piano Voice........................... 15

Try playing with enhanced, dynamic sound

(Ultra-Wide Stereo)........................................ 15

Touch Response Sensitivity ............................... 15

Adding Harmony................................................. 16

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual........ 17

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right

Hands—Split.................................................. 17

Play with a Style 18

Select a Style Rhythm ........................................ 18

Play Along with a Style ....................................... 19

Pattern Variation (Sections)................................ 20

Chords ................................................................ 21

Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary . 22

Try Playing a Song with a Style!......................... 23

Play Using the Music Database.......................... 24

Playing Songs 25

Select and Listen to a Specific Song .................. 25

Listening to the Demo Songs ............................. 26

BGM Playback.................................................... 26

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause .. 27

Changing the Melody Voice................................ 27

Using the Lesson Feature 28

Keys to Success..................................................28

Listening, Timing and Waiting .............................31

Phrase Repeat ....................................................33

A-B Repeat..........................................................34

Mute ....................................................................34

Using the Metronome..........................................35

Changing the Tempo........................................... 35

Record Your Own Performance 36

Recording............................................................ 36

Recording to a Specific track ..............................37

Deleting User Songs ...........................................39

Backup and Initialization 40

Backup ................................................................40

Initialization ......................................................... 40

Function Settings 41

Select the item and change the value .................41

Connecting to a Computer 44

Connecting a Personal Computer ....................... 44

Transferring data between the instrument and

a computer .....................................................45

Registering Style Files ........................................ 46

Appendix

Troubleshooting.............................................47

Song Book Sample ........................................ 48

Voice List ........................................................ 58

Drum Kit List ..................................................62

Style List ......................................................... 64

Music Database List ...................................... 65

Song List......................................................... 66

Effect Type List .............................................. 67

Specifications................................................. 68

Index................................................................ 69

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Setting Up

Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power.

Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an

AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not

deplete resources.

Using an AC Power Adaptor

1 Make sure that the [ ] (Standby/On) switch of the

instrument is off (the backlit display is off).

2 Connect the AC power adaptor to the power supply

jack.

3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

Using Batteries

1 Open the battery compartment cover located on the

instrument’s bottom panel.

2 Insert the six new alkaline batteries, being careful

to follow the polarity markings on the side of the

compartment.

3 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it

locks firmly in place.

For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V

“AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batter-

ies are recommended.) When battery power becomes too

low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the

sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur.

When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries,

following the precautions listed below.

If necessary, also make sure to save all important User

data (see page 45), since custom panel settings are lost

when the batteries are removed.

Power Requirements

• Use the specified adaptor (page 68). The use of other

adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the

adaptor and the instrument.

• Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the

instrument, or during electrical storms.

• Never connect or disconnect the AC power adaptor when the

batteries are installed in the instrument and the power is on.

Doing so will turn the power off, possibly resulting in loss of

the data being transferred as well as the data currently in the

transfer destination during transferring or recording of data.

WARNING

CAUTION

AC outlet

AC power

adaptor

NOTICE

• Make sure to install the batteries with the proper orientation,

maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery

installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive

chemicals.

• When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of

six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use

different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the

same time.

• If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the

batteries from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from

the battery.

• Use alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of batteries

(including rechargeable batteries) may have sudden drops of

power when battery power becomes low, possibly resulting in

loss of data in the flash memory.

• Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash

memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained

rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become

drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred

and the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost.

WARNING

NOTICE

Introduction

Setting Up

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Make all necessary connections BEFORE turning the power on.

You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a set

of headphones, keyboard amplifier, stereo system,

mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device

to send the instrument’s output signal to that device.

The internal speakers are automatically shut off when

a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUT-

PUT jack also functions as an external output.

The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain

as you play by pressing an optional footswitch. Plug

the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into the SUS-

TAIN jack and use it to switch sustain on and off.

Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER

VOLUME] control to the left and press the [ ]

(Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. While

playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by using

the [MASTER VOLUME] control. Pressing the [ ]

(Standby/On) switch again turns the power off.

To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instru-

ment features an Auto Power Off function that automati-

cally turns the power off if the instrument is not operated

for a specified period of time. The amount of time that

will elapse before the power is automatically turned off

can be set in the Function (page 43 Function 040).

Setting range: 5/10/15/30/60/120/OFF (minutes)

Default setting: 30 (minutes)

To disable the Auto Power Off function

While holding down the lowest key, press the [ ]

(Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. Alternately

select “Off” in the Function settings.

Remove the transparent protective film that was applied

to the display prior to shipment from the factory.

Connecting headphones and

external audio equipment

• You can set the Master equalizer (EQ) which is provided to

give you the best possible sound when listening through dif-

ferent reproduction systems. The Master equalizer (EQ) can

be set in the Function settings (page 42 Function 023).

• Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for

long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear

fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing.

• To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the

external devices at the minimum setting and turn power off

the devices before connecting them. Failure to observe

these precautions may result in electric shock or equip-

ment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all

devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the vol-

ume controls while playing the instrument to set the

desired listening level.

Connecting a footswitch

• Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to

the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.

• Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing

this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, result-

ing in reversed footswitch operation.

NOTE

CAUTION

NOTE

Turn on the power

• When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a

small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the

instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long

time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall

AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument.

Auto Power Off function

• The data and settings are always backed up, and are main-

tained even when the power is turned off. For information on

the backup parameters, see page 40.

Removing the protective film

CAUTION

NOTE

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Panel Controls and Terminals

Front Panel

q [ ] (Standby/On) switch..................................... page 9

w [MASTER VOLUME] control ................................page 9

e [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button .... page 31

r [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button.............................page 28

t [PHRASE REPEAT] button ................................page 33

y PART

[L] button ............................................................ page 32

[R] button............................................................ page 32

y [REC TRACK 2] button.......................................page 37

[REC TRACK 1] button.......................................page 37

u [METRONOME] button....................................... page 35

i [TEMPO/TAP] button.......................................... page 35

o [SONG] button............................................ pages 12, 25

!0 [VOICE] button ........................................... pages 12, 14

!1 [STYLE] button........................................... pages 12, 18

!2 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+/YES], [-/NO]........... page 12

!3 [FUNCTION] button............................................ page 41

!4 [DEMO/BGM] button .......................................... page 26

!5 [A-B REPEAT] button ......................................... page 34

!6 [REW] button ......................................................page 27

!7 [FF] button ..........................................................page 27

!8 [PAUSE] button................................................... page 27

!5 [ACMP ON/OFF] button ..................................... page 19

!6 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button...............................page 20

!7 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button..................................page 20

!8 [SYNC START] button ........................................ page 19

!9 [START/STOP] button ................................ pages 12, 25

@0 [REC] button.......................................................page 36

@1 [PORTABLE GRAND] button...

.......................... page 15

@2 [MUSIC DATABASE] button...............................page 24

@3 [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button ........................ page 15

@4 [SPLIT] button .................................................... page 17

@5 [DUAL] button..................................................... page 17

@6 [HARMONY] button............................................ page 16

@7 [TOUCH] button.................................................. page 15

@8 Drum Kit icons ................................................... page 14

Rear Panel

@9 SUSTAIN jack ....................................................... page 9

#0 USB terminal ...................................................... page 44

#1 PHONES/OUTPUT jack........................................ page 9

#2 DC IN jack .............................................................page 8

In the Lesson mode

In the Recording mode

In the Song mode

In the Style mode

Front Panel

Music Database List

(page 65)

Panel Controls and Terminals

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

GrandPno

001

!9 @0

@3 @4 @5 @6 @7

@2@1

#2#1@9 #0

Rear Panel

Display (page 13) Song List (page 66) Style List (page 64)

Voice List (page 58)

C3 (Middle C)

The “Press & Hold” Symbol

Buttons having this indication can

be used to call up an alternate

function when the relevant button

is pressed and held. Hold down this button

until the function is called up.

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Basic Operation and Displays

Press a button to select a basic function: Voice, Style or Song. To change the instrument voice that sounds when

you play the keyboard, press the [VOICE] button. If you want to play along with auto accompaniment, press the

[STYLE] button. If you want to listen to a song, press the [SONG] button.

Select a basic function.

[SONG] button ..............To select a Song.

[VOICE] button..............To select a Voice.

[STYLE] button..............To select a Style.

When you select a basic function, the name and number of the currently selected Song, Style or Voice is shown.

Select an item or value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Refer to the Song, Voice and Style Lists on pages 58–66.

Start a function or play the keyboard.

Voice ............................. Play the keyboard.

Song ............................. Press the [START/STOP] button to play Songs.

Style.............................. Press the [START/STOP] button to play the Style rhythm.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

Basic Operation

GrandPno

001

321

Display

(page 13)

Number buttons [0]–[9]

The number buttons can be

used to directly enter a

Song, Style or Voice num-

ber or parameter value.

For numbers that start with

one or two zeroes, the first

zeroes can be omitted.

Example:

Selecting Voice 002,

Bright Piano.

Press number buttons

[0], [0], [2].

[+], [-] buttons

Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value

by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease

the value by 1. Press and hold either button to

continuously increase or decrease the value in

the corresponding direction.

Press briefly to

decrease.

Press briefly to

increase.

Basic Operation and Displays

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Display

GrandPno

001

003

Indicate the operating condition of the

instrument (page 12).

SONG/VOICE/STYLE

Displays the melody

and chord notes of a

Song when the Song

lesson function is in

use, or the notes of

chords you specify

when the Dictionary

function is in use. At

other times the notes

you play on the key-

board are displayed.

Notation

• Any notes occurring below or

above the staff are indicated by

“8va” in the notation.

• For a few specific chords, not all

notes may be shown in the nota-

tion section of the display. This is

due to space limitations in the dis-

play.

NOTE

Appears when the Keys to Suc-

cess function is on (page 28).

Appears when the Phrase

Repeat function is on (page

33).

Song:

✩✩✩

The number of stars

depends on the number

of passed steps.

Step:

✩

KEYS TO SUCCESS

PHRASE REPEAT

Passing Status

Appears when Touch Response is

on (page 15).

Appears when ULTRA-WIDE

STEREO is on (page 15).

Appears when the auto accompa-

niment is on (page 19).

Appears when the Split function is

on (page 17).

Appears when the Dual function is

on (page 17).

Appears when the Harmony func-

tion is on (page 16).

TOUCH RESPONSE

ULTRA-WIDE STEREO

ACMP ON

SPLIT

DUAL

HARMONY

Indicates the name of

the chord currently

being played back, or

the name of the chord

being played on the keyboard.

Indicates the current measure

during playback of a Song.

Chord Display

Measure

003

Indicates the Function number when

the Function is in use.

Indicates notes currently being

played. Indicates the melody and

chord notes of a Song when the Song

lesson function is in use. Also indi-

cates the notes of a chord—either

when playing a chord or when using

the Dictionary function.

Function

Keyboard Display

027

Information related to the Song/

recording tracks is shown here.

(See pages 34 and 36.)

Lit: Track contains data

Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data

Flashing: Track is selected as recording

track

Indicates the beat of the current

Style or Song with flashing

arrows.

Song/recording track display

Beat Display

The Main display shows all of the current basic settings for Song, Style and

Voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status for

various functions.

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

This instrument features a variety of realistic, built-in voices. The grand piano Voice is

automatically selected whenever the power is turned on, but you can easily change

this to guitar, drums, or any of an extensive range of voices.

Press the [VOICE] button and then select the desired Voice, referring to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12

for instructions.

Refer to the Voice List on page 58.

Preset Voice Types

Select and Play a Voice

GrandPno

001

Voice

Grand Piano Voice Ultra-Wide

Stereo

Touch Response

Percussion and drum icons

001–140 Instrument Voices

141–153 (Drum Kit)

Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, from

which they can be played. Details on the instruments and key assignments of

each Drum Kit can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 62.

154–497 XGlite Voices

000

One Touch Setting (OTS)

The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most suitable Voice

for you when you select a Style or Song. Simply select Voice number “000” to

activate this feature.

GrandPno

001

Voice name

The Voice shown here becomes the

Main Voice for the instrument.

Voice number

Reference

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

When you simply want to play a piano Voice, all you have to do is press one convenient button.

Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button.

The Voice “Grand Piano” will automatically be selected as the Main Voice.

You can play the keyboard with a spacious, dynamic sound effect that gives you the sensation of hearing the sound

outside of the speakers.

Turn on the Ultra-Wide Stereo effect, and hear the sound expand around you—as if the speaker position is outside

of the instrument.

Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button.

To turn ULTRA-WIDE STEREO off, press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button

again.

Press the [TOUCH] button to turn Touch Response on. When Touch Response is on,

you can control the volume of notes according to how hard you play the keys.

Touch Response is normally on.

Press the [TOUCH] button again to turn Touch Response off. When Touch Response

is off, the same volume will be produced no matter how hard you play the keys.

Playing the Grand Piano Voice

Try playing with enhanced, dynamic sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo)

• The wide effect type can be

set in the Function settings

(page 42 Function 024).

SHORTCUT

You can jump directly to the

Functions Settings by press-

ing and holding the [ULTRA-

WIDE STEREO] button for

longer than a second.

NOTE

GrandPno

001

Appears when Ultra-Wide Stereo is on.

Touch Response Sensitivity

• The Touch Response func-

tion cannot be used for

some Voices (such as

organ), even if the Touch

Response icon appears in

the display.

• When Touch Response is on

you can adjust the key-

board’s sensitivity to dynam-

ics in three steps in the

Function settings (page 41

Function 006).

SHORTCUT

You can jump directly to the

Function settings by press-

ing and holding the

[TOUCH] button for longer

than a second.

NOTE

GrandPno

001

Appears when Touch Response is on.

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

This feature adds harmony notes as well as tremolo or echo effects to the Main Voice.

Press the [HARMONY] button to turn Harmony on.

When you don’t want to add harmony notes, press the [HARMONY] button

again to turn Harmony off.

Press and hold the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second.

“HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the Harmony

Type.

Select a desired Harmony type by using the number buttons

[0]–[9], [+], [-].

Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 67.

Try playing the keyboard with the Harmony function. The effect and operation

of each Harmony Type is different—refer to the section “How to sound each

Harmony type” below as well as the Harmony Type list for details.

You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 42 Function

026).

Adding Harmony

• When you press the [HAR-

MONY] button to turn this

feature on, the appropriate

Harmony type for the cur-

rently selected Main Voice is

automatically selected.

NOTE

GrandPno

001

Appears when

Harmony is on.

• You can also access the

Harmony Type setting dis-

play by pressing the [FUNC-

TION] button several times

(page 42 Function 025).

• Harmony will be turned off if

the Chord Dictionary func-

tion is used.

NOTE

Trio

Currently selected Harmony type

• The Harmony notes can be

added only to the Main

Voice, not to Dual or Split

Voices.

• The keys left of the Split

Point of the keyboard pro-

duce no Harmony notes

when auto accompaniment

is on (ACMP ON is lit).

NOTE

How to sound each Harmony type

• Harmony type 01–05 • Harmony type 13–19 (Tremolo)

• Harmony type 06–12 (Trill) • Harmony type 20–26 (Echo)

Press the right-hand keys while playing

chords in the auto accompaniment

range of the keyboard when auto

accompaniment is on (page 19).

Keep holding

down the keys.

Hold down two keys.

Play the keys.

Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

You can select a second Voice which will play in addition to the Main Voice selected on page 12. This second

Voice is known as the Dual Voice.

Press the [DUAL] button to turn the Dual function on.

When Dual is on, you can play a Dual Voice in a layer with the Main Voice.

To turn the Dual Voice off and play only the Main Voice, press the [DUAL] button

again.

In the Split mode you can play different Voices to the left and right of the keyboard “Split Point.”

The main and Dual Voices can be played to the right of the Split Point, while the Voice played to the left of the

Split Point is known as the “Split Voice”

Press the [SPLIT] button to turn the Split function on.

When Split is on you can play a Split Voice to the left of the Split Point.

When you don’t want to play a Split Voice, press the [SPLIT] button to turn Split off.

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual

Two Voices sound at the same time

• The Dual Voice setting can

be changed in the Function

settings (page 42 Function

011).

SHORTCUT

You can jump directly to the

Function settings by pressing

and holding the [DUAL] button

for longer than a second.

• When you select a Voice of

the “DUAL” category

(123–132), Dual is turned on

automatically.

NOTE

Flute

001

Appears when

dual is on

Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split

36 48

60 72 84

Split Voice

Main Voice and Dual Voice

Split Point ...... default setting: 54 (F#2)

• The Split Voice setting can

be changed in the Function

settings (page 42 Function

015).

SHORTCUT

You can jump directly to the

Function settings by pressing

and holding the [SPLIT] button

for longer than a second.

• The Split Point setting can

be changed in the Function

Settings (page 41 Function

005).

NOTE

Choir

001

Appears when

Split is on.

Adding other effects to the sound

You can also play the sounds of the instrument adding Reverb, Chorus and Sustain.

The best-suited Reverb and Chorus type is automatically selected whenever you select a Song or Style, but you

can select any of the available Reverb or Chorus Types. These effects can be set in the Function settings (page

42). Refer to the Reverb and Chorus Type lists on page 67 for details.

Reverb........................This effect adds the ambience of a room or concert hall to the sound.

Chorus........................This effect makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious.

Panel Sustain .............This function adds a fixed sustain to the keyboard Voices.

The sustain function can also be applied with the optional footswitch (page 9).

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Play with a Style

This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment

(rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your

left hand. You can select from 106 different styles covering a range of musical genres

and time signatures.

Most Styles include a rhythm part. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played

using percussion instruments only.

Press the [STYLE] button and then select the desired Style, referring to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12

for instructions.

Refer to the Style List on page 64.

Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the Style rhythm.

Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback.

Select a Style Rhythm

GrandPno

001

Press the [STYLE] button to access the

Style Functions (printed below).

• To adjust the tempo of the

Style, see page 35.

NOTE

8BtModrn

001

Style number Style name

• Since the Pianist category

Styles (098–106) have no

rhythm parts, no sound will

be produced if you start

rhythm-only playback.

To use these Styles, turn on

the auto accompaniment

and play the keyboard as

described on page 19 (The

bass and chord accompani-

ment parts will sound.)

NOTE

Play with a Style

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompani-

ment that you can play along with.

Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired Style.

For instructions on how to select a Style, see page 12.

Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn automatic accompani-

ment on.

Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off.

Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the Sync Start function on.

Start playing.

Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the Auto Accompani-

ment range of the keyboard. Try playing other chords with your left hand and

play a melody with your right hand.

Stop playing.

Playback will stop as soon as you press the [START/STOP] button.

You can also stop playing by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button so that

an appropriate ending pattern will play and then Style playback will stop (page

20).

Play Along with a Style

• You can also select commer-

cially available Style Files.

To do this load the Style

Files from the computer to

the instrument, and then

ing with Style number 107

(page 46). If the Style File

has not been registered,

“No data” will be displayed

when selecting Style num-

ber 107.

NOTE

LoveSong

001

Appears when auto

accompaniment is on

• The Split Point setting can

be changed in the Function

settings (page 41 Function

005).

NOTE

When auto accompaniment is on ...

The keys to the left of the Split Point (54; F#2) will play only chords. This is

known as the “Auto Accompaniment range.”

36 48

7260

Split Point........default setting: 54 (F#2)

Auto

Accompaniment

range

LoveSong

018

001

Flashes when Sync Start is on.

• You can also press the

[START/STOP] button to

begin the rhythm of the

selected Style. The bass

and chords will begin play-

ing as soon as you play a

key in the Auto Accompani-

ment range of the keyboard.

NOTE

• The Style Volume can be

adjusted in the Function set-

tings (page 41 Function

001).

SHORTCUT

You can jump directly to the

Function settings by pressing

and holding the [STYLE] but-

ton for longer than a second.

NOTE

Play with a Style

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

The instrument features a wide variety of Style “Sections” (patterns) that allow you to vary the

arrangement of the accompaniment to match the Song you are playing.

Pattern Variation (Sections)

Adding an Intro

Pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button before playing back the

Style automatically adds a short introduction before starting the

actual (Main) rhythm.

When the intro finishes playing, Style playback shifts to the Main

Section.

Adding an Ending

Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button to begin playing an ending

Section. Playback will stop when the ending has played all the way

through.

If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button a second time (while

the ending is playing) the ending will play ritardando (the tempo will

gradually get slower).

Switching Main Sections

There are two variations on the basic Section

(A and B).

This switches between the Main A and Main B

Sections, automatically playing a fill-in pattern

to smoothly lead into the next Section.

You can also select either the Main A or B

Section to start by pressing the [MAIN/AUTO

FILL] button before starting the Style.

Adding a Fill-in

A Fill-in pattern is automatically added before

changing to Section A or B.

Recommended method for using Sections

 Setup

1. Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style.

2. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on.

3. Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button.

4. Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to select Main A or Main B.

5. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Sync Start on.

You’re now ready to play the intro.

 Start playing

6. As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts.

7. Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. (Switching Main Sections/Adding a Fill-in)

 Ending

8. Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. (Adding an Ending)

An appropriate ending Section will play and then Style playback will stop.

You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again

while the ending is playing back.

Play with a Style

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows common chords for your reference. Since there are

many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books

for further details. You can also look up chords using the Chord Dictionary function in this instrument (page 22).

 Indicates the root note.

• Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions: m7, m7

5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7

5, 6(9), sus2

• Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted.

• Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only.

• If you play a chord which does not exist, the name of chord is not shown in the display, and the Style plays back only rhythm and bass.

Chords

Major Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh

Easy Chords

This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three

fingers.

For root “C”

To play a major chord

Press the root note ()

of the chord.

To play a minor chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

black key to the left of it.

To play a seventh chord

Press the root note

together with the nearest

white key to the left of it.

To play a minor seventh chord

Press the root note together with

the nearest white and black keys

to the left of it (three keys alto-

gether).

Play with a Style

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord dictionary” that shows you the individual notes of chords.

This is convenient when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it.

Press and hold the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button

for longer than a second.

“Dict.” will appear in the display.

As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh)

chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled

“ROOT .” (The note doesn’t sound.)

The root note you set is shown in the display.

Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard

labeled “CHORD TYPE .” (The note doesn’t sound.)

The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are

shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram.

To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons.

Try playing a chord in the auto accompaniment range (refer on

page 19) of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display.

When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and

the chord name in the display flashes.

Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary

Hold for longer

than a second.

Dict.

001

Keys for chord type

dictionary

Keys for root

dictionary

The highest key

• Major chords are usually

indicated by the root name

only. For example, the indi-

cation “C” in a score refers

to a “C Major” chord. To look

up the fingering for a major

chord press the root key and

then the M chord type key.

• These chords are not shown

in the Chord Dictionary func-

tion: 6(9), M7(9), M7(

11 ) ,

5, M7

5, M7aug, m7(11),

mM7(9), mM7

5, 7

5, sus2

NOTE

Dict.

001

Notation of chord

Chord name (root and type)

Individual notes of chord

(keyboard)

Play with a Style

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Let’s try out the Song “Aura Lee.” For information on how to play Styles using chords, see pages 19 and 20.

Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand.

Practice

Aura Lee

Composer: G. Poulton

Try Playing a Song with a Style!

Recommended Style: 018 Love Song

Recommended Voice: 047 String Ensemble

Standard Chords

Easy Chords

Play with a Style

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best Voice and Style for the

type of music you want to play, simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings

will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style!

Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button.

A Music Database name will appear in the display.

Select a Music Database.

Referring to the Music Database category list printed on the panel, select a

Music Database that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For

example, select one from the “SWING&JAZZ” category (047–056) if you want

to play jazz.

Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right.

A jazz Style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the

Split Point (page 19). Refer to page 21 for information about playing chords.

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback.

You can also stop playback by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button (page

20).

Play Using the Music Database

AlvFever

001

• Refer to the Music Database

List on page 65.

NOTE

MoonLit

051

001

• The Split Point setting can

be changed in the Function

settings (page 41 Function

005).

NOTE

36 48

7260

Split Point........default setting: 54 (F#2)

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Playing Songs

This instrument has 102 built-in Songs. For this instrument, the term “Song” refers to

the data that makes up a piece of music. Try selecting and listening to the various Songs.

Press the [SONG] button and then select the desired Song, referring to the section

“Basic Operation” on page 12 for instructions.

Refer to the Song List on page 66.

Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the Song.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

GrandPno

001

SongStart/Stop DEMO/BGM

Press the [SONG] button to access the SONG

functions (printed above the buttons).

Select and Listen to a Specific Song

• Song number “004” is automat-

ically selected whenever the

power is turned ON. When you

want to select one of the Song

numbers 001–003, use the

number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

• To adjust the tempo of song

playback, see page 35.

• You can adjust the balance

between Song playback and

the notes you play on the key-

board by setting the volume of

the playback sound (page 41

Function 002).

SHORTCUT

You can jump directly to the

Function settings by pressing

and holding the [SONG] button

for longer than a second.

NOTE

Demo 1

001

005

Song number Song name

These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument.

Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can

practice with ease, and another more challenging version.

We’ve collected various folk songs from around the world which have been

handed down from through the generations, as well as famous classical pieces.

Try playing the melody of these songs with your right hand.

Enjoy performing a piece with Style accompaniment (automatic accompani-

ment data). (Keys to Success is designed so that you master playing the melody

with your right hand first, and then learn the roots of the chords with your left

hand.)

These songs feature solo instruments other than piano—letting you enjoy play-

ing other instrumental voices along with orchestral accompaniment.

These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known

piano pieces. Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or

along with orchestral backing.

Playing Songs

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Press the [DEMO] button.

Songs 001, 002, 003 play in sequence, and playback will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song

001.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] or [START/STOP] button.

With the default setting only a few of the internal songs are played back and repeated when the [DEMO/BGM]

button is pressed. This setting can be changed so that all internal songs are played, or all songs transferred to the

instrument from a computer are played.

Four playback group settings are provided. Simply select the one that suits your needs.

Press and hold the [DEMO/BGM] button for longer than a sec-

ond.

“DemoGrp” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently

selected repeat playback target will be displayed.

Use the [+] or [-] button to select a repeat playback group from the

table below.

Press the [DEMO/BGM] button.

The songs in the group selected play in sequence.

You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] or [START/STOP]

button.

Listening to the Demo Songs

BGM Playback

• You can also set the demo

group in the Function set-

tings (page 43 Function

037).

NOTE

Hold for longer than a second.

• When User songs and

Download songs data do

not exist, Demo songs are

played back.

NOTE

Demo Preset songs (001–003)

Preset All preset songs (001–102)

User All User songs (103–107)

Download All songs transferred from a computer (108–)

• You can select a song by

using the [+] button after

pressing the [DEMO/BGM]

button. The [-] button can be

used to go back to the

beginning of the selected

song.

NOTE

Random Song Playback

The Random Play mode causes the songs in the group selected for BGM playback to be played back in random

order. (Demo group Songs [Preset Songs 001–003] cannot be played at random.)

The setting of the Random Play mode can be set in the Function settings (page 43 Function 038).

Playing Songs

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward (FF), rewind

(REW) and pause (PAUSE) playback of the song.

[REW] button ........ Fast-reverses the Song if pressed during playback (no sound is

heard during fast reverse). Decreases the measure number if pressed

while playback is stopped.

[FF] button............. Fast-forwards the Song if pressed during playback. Increases the

measure number if pressed while playback is stopped.

[PAUSE] button..... Temporarily stops playback. Press this button a second time to

resume playback from the point at which it was stopped.

You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other Voice you prefer.

Select the Song and play it.

Refer to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12.

Select a desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

The selected Voice sounds when you play the keyboard.

Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second.

“SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, indicating

that the Voice selected in Step 2 has replaced the Song’s original melody Voice.

Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause

• When an A-B repeat (page

34) range is specified the

fast reverse and forward

function will only work within

that range.

• [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE]

button cannot be used dur-

ing Song playback by using

the [DEMO/BGM] button.

NOTE

Changing the Melody Voice

• You cannot change the mel-

ody Voice of a User Song.

• When you select a Voice of

the DUAL category (123–

132), only the Voice whose

MIDI program change num-

ber is indicated in the Voice

List (page 59) is played.

NOTE

• If a Song has played

through and stopped during

this procedure, press the

[START/STOP] button to

start playback again.

NOTE

HnkyTonk

004

Hold for longer than a second.

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Using the Lesson Feature

You can practice the preset Songs using these lesson functions: “Keys to Success,”

“Listening, Timing, Waiting” and “Phrase Repeat.” Keys to Success helps you master a

Song, whereas Listening, Timing, Waiting helps you first master the timing then play-

ing the correct notes. Phrase Repeat lets you select and repeatedly practice a specific

phrase in the Song. If you’re using a keyboard instrument for the first time, we suggest

you start with Keys to Success.

You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To

obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website:

https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

In the “Keys to Success” mode, you can practice individual phrases in the Song (as “Steps”), letting you effec-

tively master the Song by mastering each phrase separately. Each time you finish a specific Step, your score is

shown in the display. Passing one Step (with a score of 60 or better) lets you go on to next one automatically. All

preset Songs other than 001–003 can be used with this mode, especially the “LEARN TO PLAY” category Songs

(004–019).

Select a song for your lesson.

For this example we’ll select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the “LEARN TO

PLAY” category. For instructions on how to select a Song, see page 12.

Turn Keys to Success on.

Pressing the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button turns the Keys to Success feature

on, and a Step of the Song is automatically selected for your practice. The cur-

rently selected Step number and the lesson parts are shown in the display.

Keys to Success

GrandPno

001

1342

• The score for “Für Elise

(Basic)” is provided on page

48.

• Song numbers 001 to 003

cannot be used for the Les-

son feature. If you select one

of these Songs, “NoLes-

son” is shown in the display.

NOTE

Elise 1

004

• The total number of Steps

varies depending on the

Song.

• Each lesson part varies

depending on the Steps.

NOTE

Step01

Appears when Keys to Success is on

Lesson part

: Right-hand lesson

: Left-hand lesson

: Both-hands lesson

Current Step number

Using the Lesson Feature

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Start the Lesson.

Press the [START/STOP] button to start Lesson. After the lead-in, Step 01 of the

song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes appear in the display.

You can start playing along on the keyboard as soon as the lead-in finishes.

The score marker and keyboard marker in the display will indicate the notes to

play.

Each time you have practiced all the way through a Step, your performance will

be evaluated and your score (from 0–100) is shown in the display.

You can select another Step as desired by using the [+]/[-] buttons.

All songs have a finishing Step, and in that Step, you will practice all the way

thorough the song which you have selected as a lesson Song in Step 1. When

you pass all Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automatically be turned off

and playback stops.

Stop Lesson.

You can stop the Lesson at any time by pressing the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] but-

ton.

• In some Steps, the lead-in

may run a little slower than

normal because a ritar-

dando or fermata section is

placed before the Step.

• You can practice the speci-

fied phrase using the Les-

son modes “1 Listening,” “2

Timing” or “3 Waiting”

described on page 31. In

these Lesson modes with

the Keys to Success func-

tion, however, it is not possi-

ble to pass the Step. When

you want to turn off these

Lesson modes, press the [1

LISTENING 2 TIMING 3

WAITING] button a number

of times to select off (“Step

number” will appear in the

display).

• If the specified part is both

hands, you cannot pass the

Step until you play both

hands, even if you play one

of the hands well. Only a

message such as “L-part is

Nice” appears in the display.

NOTE

Score of

0–59

Try the same Step again. The same Step begins automatically.

Score of

60–100

You passed! The next Step begins automatically.

Step01

001

Excellen

068

Displayed when you’ve

passed the Step.

• When you want to select

another Song during a les-

son, press the [SONG] but-

ton to call up the currently

selected Song name in the

display (for three seconds),

then select the Song as

required using the [+]/[-]

buttons or number buttons

while the Song name

appears. When you select

the new Song, the lowest

number Step not yet passed

of the Song will automati-

cally be selected for the Les-

son.

NOTE

Elise 1

004

001

Using the Lesson Feature

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Entering and Clearing the Passing Status

 Entering

Passing status will automatically be entered and shown in the display when the Step

or Song is selected. You can recognize at a glance whether or not you’ve passed the

selected Step or Song.

When Step is selected

When Song is selected

 Clearing

You can clear existing passing status entries. Select the desired Song or Step for

clearing the passing status and hold the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer

than three seconds. After the passing status has been cleared, a “Cleared” message

will appear on the display. Once the operation has been completed, no information

will appear even when selecting the Song or Step.

Step01

001

✩: Passed

No information: Not yet passed

Elise 1

004

001

✩✩✩ : There are one or more Steps not yet passed in

addition to the last Step

✩✩✩ : Only last Step passed

✩✩✩ : All Steps passed other than last Step

✩✩✩ : All Steps passed

• You cannot clear any entries

during Song or Step play-

back. If a Song or Step is

currently being played back,

stop playback first.

• Deleting the recorded Song

will delete all Step passing

status entries as well.

NOTE

Cleared

Hold for longer than

three seconds

Using the Lesson Feature

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

You can select any Song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands

lesson. Song Lesson lets you learn how to play Songs in three easy steps.

The Lesson modes:

 1 Listening

There’s no need to play the keyboard in this mode. The model melody/chords (in

other words, the musical material you should learn) of the part you selected will

sound. Listen to it carefully and learn it well.

 2 Timing

In this mode, try playing the notes with the correct timing. Simply concentrate on

playing each note in time with the rhythmic accompaniment. The correct notes

sound even if you play wrong notes as long as you play in time with the rhythm. Play

the notes shown in the display.

 3 Waiting

In this mode, try playing the correct notes. The notes you should play appear in the

score and the keyboard on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note.

Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will

slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace and

tempo.

Listening, Timing and Waiting

• Songs that can be used with

the Lesson feature include

Songs transferred from a

computer to flash memory

(SMF Format 0 only; see

page 45). The procedure for

transferring songs are

described on page 45.

• User Songs cannot be used

for the lesson.

NOTE

LISTEN

004

The notation and key positions of the model melody are

shown in the display.

TIMING

004

• When you don’t want to

change the Song playback

tempo, or you want to learn

using the original tempo,

you can change the setting

in the Function settings

(page 43 Function 036).

NOTE

WAITING

004

Using the Lesson Feature

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Lesson Operation

Select the desired Song for your lesson.

For instructions on how to select a Song, see page 12.

Select the part you want to practice.

Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand lesson, or

press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-hands lesson.

The selected part is displayed.

Select the Lesson mode.

Each time the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button is pressed the

lesson modes are selected in sequence: 1 Listening  2 Timing  3 Waiting 

Off  1 Listening ...etc. The currently selected Lesson mode is shown in the

display.

Start Lesson.

Song playback will begin automatically when you select the Lesson mode, and

the appropriate notes appear in the display.

Stop the Lesson mode.

You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] but-

ton.

Grade

When the Lesson Song has played all the way through in Lesson mode “2 Timing”

or “3 Waiting,” your performance will be evaluated in four levels: OK, Good, Very

Good, or Excellent.

• The following songs are

intended for use as right-

hand lessons, and cannot

be used for left-hand or

both-hands lessons. If you

select a right-hand lesson

Song, a “No LPart” mes-

sage is shown in the display.

Song numbers:

020–050, 071–076, 079

• For songs transferred from a

computer, the “No LPart”

indication does not appear,

even when there is no left

hand part in the song.

NOTE

RightLeft

BothHand

Left-hand lesson Right-hand lesson

Both-hands lesson

• When the melody Voice of

the Song is changed, the

key position shown in the

display may be shifted (in

octave units), depending on

the Voice selected.

• You can select Lesson

modes by repeatedly press-

ing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIM-

ING 3 WAITING] button.

NOTE

• You cannot use Dual or Split

Voices during lessons.

• The Split Point is fixed and it

cannot be changed. For the

left-hand lesson, it is fixed at

59 or B2; for the left-hand

chord lesson, it is fixed at 54

or F

NOTE

Using the Lesson Feature

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

This function allows you to repeatedly practice difficult phrases, by selecting a

phrase and repeatedly play it back. You can also mute one of the parts, and practice

just the other part repeatedly. The specified phrase can also be practiced along with

the Lesson modes “1 Listening,” “2 Timing” or “3 Waiting” described on page 31.

Play the Song and press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button at the phrase you want to

repeat. The appropriate phrase number will appear in the display and, after a lead-in,

repeat playback will start.

Use the [+] or [-] buttons to select any phrase number in the Song, and stop repeat

playback by pressing the [PHRASE REPEAT] button. The Phrase Repeat mode will

be canceled and normal playback of the Song will continue.

Specifying extended, multiple phrases

You can specify an extended section for repeating (including multiple phrases) by

specifying a beginning phrase (point A) and ending phrase (point B), using the [A-B

REPEAT] button. You can do this either during playback or while playback is

stopped.

Press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning phrase of the section you want to

repeat (point A), use the [+]/[-] buttons to select the subsequent phrases you wish to

include in the repeat, then press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time. This spec-

ifies the last phrase selected as the end phrase (point B) for Phrase Repeat playback.

“REPEAT” will appear on the display and the specified A-B section of the Song will

now play repeatedly. (If playback is stopped, press the [START/STOP] button to

start.)

Stop A-B Repeat playback by pressing the [PHRASE REPEAT] button.

“REPEAT” will appear on the display and the currently selected phrase will play-

back repeatedly.

Phrase Repeat

• When you want to turn the

Phrase Repeat function on,

please make sure that the

Keys to Success mode is off,

since Phrase Repeat is not

available in the Keys to Suc-

cess mode.

• When you want to change

the Song, first turn off the

Phrase Repeat function then

select the Song.

• If you use the Phrase

Repeat function with the

Lesson modes “1 Listening,”

“2 Timing” or “3 Waiting”, the

evaluation function of these

Lesson modes is not avail-

able. When you want to turn

these Lesson modes off,

press the [1 LISTENING 2

TIMING 3 WAITING] button

a number of times to select

off (“Phrase number” will

appear in the display).

NOTE

Phrase mark

Repeat playback of this section

REPEAT

P03

Appears when the Phrase Repeat function is on

Phrase number

• Specifying only Point A

results in repeat playback

between Point A and the

end of the Song.

NOTE

Using the Lesson Feature

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

This function lets you specify a section of a Song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat

playback.

Play the Song and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section

you want to repeat (the “A” point), then press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second

time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). The specified A-B

section of the Song will now play repeatedly.

You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button.

An “oFF REPEAT” message appears on the display. The A-B REPEAT mode will be

canceled and normal playback of the Song will continue.

The Song is made up by several tracks.

You can mute Track 1 or Track 2 during Song playback. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as

desired, allowing you to listen to the corresponding part (the part that is turned on), or practice the corresponding

part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard.

• Track 1 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 1] button during Song playback.

• Track 2 or style track can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 2] button during Song playback.

You can cancel the mute function by pressing the corresponding track buttons, [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] again

during Song playback, or by selecting any other Song.

A-B Repeat

Repeat playback of this section

• The repeat start and end

points can be specified in

one-measure increments.

• You can also set the A-B

Repeat function when the

Song is stopped. Simply use

the [REW] and [FF] buttons

to select the desired mea-

sures, pressing the [A-B

REPEAT] button for each

point, then start playback.

• If you want to set the start

point “A” at the very begin-

ning of the Song press the

[A-B REPEAT] button before

starting playback of the

Song.

NOTE

REPEAT

A−b

• The A-B Repeat function will

be canceled when you

select another Song mode.

NOTE

Mute

FrereJac

020

010

Pressing one of the Track

buttons [TRACK 1] or

[TRACK 2] will mute the

corresponding track during

Song playback.

Lit: Track contains data. Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data.

Using the Lesson Feature

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

The instrument features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) that is convenient for prac-

ticing.

Press the [METRONOME] button to start the metronome.

To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again.

You can adjust the metronome tempo by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button (see

next section).

Songs and Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow.

Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in

the display.

Set the Tempo by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Tap Start

You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the

[TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—four times for time signatures in 4, and three

times for time signatures in 3—and the selected Song and Style rhythm will begin

playing at the tapped tempo.

You can change the tempo during Song or Style playback by pressing the button just

twice.

Using the Metronome

• You can set the time signa-

ture and the volume of the

Metronome (page 43 Func-

tion 031–033).

SHORTCUT

You can jump directly to the

Function settings by press-

ing and holding the [MET-

RONOME] button for longer

than a second.

• The metronome time signa-

ture will synchronize to a

style or song that is playing,

so these parameters cannot

be changed while a style or

song is playing.

NOTE

Changing the Tempo

Tempo

070

Current Tempo value

• Press the [+] and [-] buttons

simultaneously to instantly

reset the value to the default

tempo.

NOTE

• In the case of a Style, the

selected Style rhythm will

begin playing at first. The

bass and chords will begin

playing as soon as you play

a chord in the auto accom-

paniment range of the key-

board (when auto

accompaniment is on).

• Tap tempo setting range:

32–280

NOTE

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Record Your Own Performance

You can record up to five of your own performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song

numbers 103–107). Think of each User Song as a kind of basket or drawer for storing

your recordings. Remember that you can also record a Style (containing chord

changes) along with your own performance.

Press the [REC] button.

After you’ve selected the desired User Song for recording, you can select a Style

to be recorded as well. To do this, press the [STYLE] button and select the Style

number while the ACMP indication is on.

You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button again

( and stop flashing).

Start recording.

When you play the keyboard, recording will begin.

By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when auto accompaniment is set to

on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded with your performance.

When auto accompaniment is set to off, only your keyboard performance is

recorded.

Recording

• If all User Songs (Song

numbers 103–107) contain

recorded data, Song 103

will automatically be

selected. In this case, you

will record over and erase

any previous data in Song

103, so be careful that you

won’t be erasing any mate-

rial you want to keep!

NOTICE

User 1

rEC

001

The lowest-numbered unrecorded User

Song (Song numbers 103–107) available

for recording is displayed. If you want to

select the Song you will be recording,

select the desired Song number by using

the [+] and [-] buttons.

Flashes

• Accompaniment cannot be

turned on or off once the

[REC] button is pressed.

NOTE

• A total of approximately

10,000 notes or 5,500 chord

changes can be recorded to

the five User Songs.

NOTE

36 48

7260

Split Point

Record Your Own Performance

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Stop recording.

Pressing the [START/STOP] button stops recording and writes the data to the

User Song. (A “Writing!” message is shown.)

To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button.

The User Songs are organized into two tracks: Track 1 and Track 2. You can specify the track you want to record

to.

About track recording

If you start recording by specifying a track, the track will be overwritten (existing

data in the track is deleted and replaced with the new recording).

Only your keyboard performance can be recorded to Track 1. Either a Style or your

performance can be recorded to Track 2, resulting in a User Song like that depicted

below.

• Never attempt to turn the

power off when a “Writ-

ing!” message is shown in

the display. Doing so can

damage the flash memory

device and result in a loss

of data.

• Use the Musicsoft Down-

loader to backup the User

Songs to a computer (page

45).

NOTICE

NOTE

In order to record with the Style, turn auto accompaniment to on (see Step 2

on page 19), and then record according to the instructions.

In order to record only your performance, turn auto accompaniment to off

and record according to the normal steps.

(The “ACMP ON” lights.)

(The “ACMP ON” is unlit.)

Recording to a Specific track

• Record following the steps

in the previous page, and

your performance will be

recorded to Track 1 and the

Style (if you are playing one)

will be recorded to Track 2.

NOTE

User Song

Data that can be

recorded to Track 2

Data that can be

recorded to Track 1

Style playback* (including

chord changes) or your own

keyboard performance

* When playing

the Style

Recording to the specified track

Your own keyboard

performance only

• You cannot record the

Reverb Level, metronome

click, or the Transpose and

Tuning settings.

• The following settings and

buttons cannot be changed,

or if changed, the new set-

tings cannot be recorded if

entered during the recording

process.

ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point,

Reverb Type, Chorus Type,

Harmony Type, [FUNC-

TION] button, [PORTABLE

GRAND] button.

NOTE

User Song

Track 2 Track 1

Style

Yo u r o w n

keyboard

performance

User Song

Track 2 Track 1

Yo u r o w n

keyboard

performance

Yo u r o w n

keyboard

performance

Record Your Own Performance

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Selecting a specific track for recording

Turn ACMP (auto accompaniment) on or off, depending on what

you want to record.

If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on. If you want to record only

your own keyboard performance, turn ACMP off.

Specify the track you want to record.

Specify Track 2 when you want to record the Style.

When you want to record your own keyboard performance, you can specify

either track.

 Recording to Track 1

While holding the [REC] button, press the [REC TRACK 1] button.

 Recording to Track 2

While holding the [REC] button, press the [REC TRACK 2] button.

Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to

record.

If you want to record Style playback to Track 2, press the [STYLE] button and

select the desired Style.

Start recording

Perform steps 2 and 3 on pages 36–37.

By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when auto accompaniment is set to

on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded. Only your performance is recorded

by playing the keyboard (any key is OK) when auto accompaniment is set to off.

• Keep in mind that both

Tracks 1 and 2 will be over-

written with new data if you

record without specifying

the tracks.

• The both “L” and “R”

flashes, this indicates that

you have specified Track 1

when auto accompaniment

is on. If you want to record

your own performance,

press the [TRACK 2] button

to stop the “L” flashing. If you

want to record a Style, press

the [REC] button to cancel

the recording, and repeat

the procedure from the

beginning.

NOTE

User 1

rEC

001

Press simultaneously

Flashes when Track 1 is

selected for recording.

User 1

rEC

001

Press simultaneously

Flashes when

track 2 is selected

for recording.

Lights when recorded data exists.

Turns off when there is no

recorded data, or when Mute

is set to on (page 34) to turn off

playback of the track.

• If you want to record only the

rhythm (percussion) part,

press the [START/STOP]

button to play just the

rhythm, then add the section

change by pressing the

[INTO/ENDING/rit.] button or

[MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.

• You can record a new track

while listening to a previ-

ously recorded track (the

track indication will appear).

You can also mute recorded

tracks (the track will disap-

pear) while recording a new

track by pressing the

desired track button.

NOTE

User 3

rEC

Record Your Own Performance

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Deleting an entire User Song.

Press the [SONG] button and select the User Song you want to

delete by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second.

The Song Delete display appears.

You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button.

Press the [+/YES] button.

A confirmation message will appear on the display.

You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button.

Press the [+/YES] button to delete the Song.

“Writing!” message will appear while the track is being deleted.

Deleting User Songs

• You cannot delete a specific

track from a User Song.

NOTE

User 1

103

ClrUser1

YES

Hold for longer

than a second.

Sure?

YES

Writing!

000

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Backup and Initialization

The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off.

If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation “Initialization” as explained below.

This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The

following initialization procedures are provided.

Initialization

To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory turn the power on by pressing

the [ ] (Standby/On) switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard.

The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored.

Initialization does not delete the files transferred from the computer. If you want to

delete the files, see “Deleting Files” below.

Deleting Files

To clear song and style files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory

from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [ ] (Standby/On) switch while

simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest

black keys.

Backup

• You can save the settings as

backup data to your com-

puter, by using the Musicsoft

Downloader (MSD) soft-

ware. Refer to the section

“Transferring data between

the instrument and a com-

puter” on page 45.

NOTE

Backup parameters

• User Songs

• Style Number 107

• Touch Response on/off

• Passing status of Song and Step

• FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume,

Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Your Tempo, Demo

Group, Demo Play Mode, Demo Cancel, Master EQ

type, Panel Sustain, Auto Power Off

Initialization

• When you execute the Ini-

tialization, backup parame-

ters will be cleared.

NOTICE

• When you delete the files,

Song data and Style data

you have purchased and

downloaded will also be

cleared. Make sure to save

your important data by

transferring to a computer

using Musicsoft Down-

loader (page 45).

NOTICE

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Function Settings

The [FUNCTION] button gives you access to a variety of operations related to adjusting

or enhancing the sound and making settings for connection to external devices.

For more about the available functions, see the following Function Setting List.

Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the

desired item appears.

Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the Function number increases

one by one.

You can also decrease the Function number by one when you press the [-] but-

ton briefly while holding down the [FUNCTION] button.

If the Function includes sub-modes, the Function item appears in the display for

a few seconds, and the sub-modes will be displayed.

Set the value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-].

Function Setting List

Select the item and change the value

• The Function number will

not appear in the display

during Song, Style or metro-

nome playback. The mea-

sure will appear instead.

NOTE

001

StyleVol

100

Value Function item

Function number

• Some Function settings are

stored in memory as soon as

they are changed. See “The

Backup Parameters” on

page 40 for information on

the Function settings that

are stored on the instrument.

• To exit the Function settings,

press one of these buttons;

[SONG], [VOICE],[STYLE]

or [GRAND PIANO].

NOTE

Direct numeric entry.

• Decrement value by 1.

• No

• Off

• Increment value by 1.

• Yes

• On

Press simultaneously to

recall the default setting.

No. Item Display

Range/

settings

Default

setting

Description

Volume

001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Style.

002 Song Volume SongVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Song.

Overall

003 Transpose Transpos -12–00–12 00

Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments.

NOTE: The pitch of the Drum Kits Voices cannot be changed.

004 Tuning Tuning

427.0–453.0

(Hz)

440.0 (Hz)

Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument

in approx. 0.2Hz increments.

NOTE: The pitch of the Drum Kits Voices cannot be changed.

005 Split Point SplitPnt

000–127

(C-2–G8)

54 (F#2)

Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split

“point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower)

and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompani-

ment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value.

006 Touch Sensitivity TouchSns

1 Soft

2 Medium

3 Hard

2 Medium

When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of

the feature. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume

variation in response to keyboard dynamics.

Function Settings

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Style File

007 Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn –

Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded

from computer (page 46).

Main Voice

008 Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 *

Determines the volume of the Main Voice to adjust the balance

between Song playback and the notes you play on the key-

board.

009 Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–0–2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice.

010

Main Voice Chorus

Send Level

M.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Dual Voice

011 Dual Voice D.Voice 001–497 * Selects the Dual Voice.

012 Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 0–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice.

013 Dual Voice Octave D.Octave -2–0–2 * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice.

014

Dual Voice Chorus

Send Level

D.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Split Voice

015 Split Voice S.Voice 001–497 * Selects the Split Voice.

016 Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice.

017 Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–0–2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice.

018

Split Voice Chorus

Send Level

S.Chorus 000–127 *

Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the

Chorus effect.

Effect

019 Reverb Type Reverb 01–10 **

Determines the Reverb type, including off (10).

Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 67.

020 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 64

Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the

Reverb effect.

021 Chorus Type Chorus 1–5 **

Determines the Chorus type, including off (05).

Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 67.

022 Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether or not Panel Sustain is always applied to

the Main/Dual/Split Voices. Panel Sustain is applied continu-

ously when ON, or not applied when OFF.

023 Master EQ Type MasterEQ

1 Speaker

2 Flat

1 Speaker

Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum

sound in different listening situations.

Speaker: For listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers.

Flat: For headphones, or for listening via external speakers.

024 Wide Type Wide 1–3 2

Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type.

Higher values produce a greater Wide effect.

Harmony

025 Harmony Type HarmType 01– 26 *

Determines the Harmony type.

Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 67.

026 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 *

Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when one of the

Harmony types 1–5 is selected.

MIDI

027 PC Mode PC mode OFF/PC1/PC2 OFF

Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer

(page 43).

028 Local On/Off Local ON/OFF ON

Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the

internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF).

Both the notes played on the instrument’s keyboard and data

received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will be played by

the internal tone generator.

Off

With this setting, the instrument itself produces no sound, but

the performance data is transmitted via the MIDI terminal.

Data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will also be

played by the internal tone generator.

029 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the inter-

nal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON).

No. Item Display

Range/

settings

Default

setting

Description

Function Settings

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

* Different for each voice combination.

** Different for each Song or Style combination.

 PC Mode (FUNCTION 027)

The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below).

* Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Song playback.

** Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Style playback.

*** Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF).

030 Initial Setup Send InitSend YES/NO –

Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer.

Use the [+] button to transmit the data.

Metronome

031

Time Signature

Numerator

TimeSigN 00–60 **

Determines the time signature of the Metronome.

A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the

other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at

the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”.

032

Time Signature

Denominator

TimeSigD

Half note,

Quarter note,

Eighth note,

Sixteenth note

** Sets the length of each metronome beat.

033 Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome.

Lesson

034 Lesson Track (R) R-Part 01–16 01

Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson.

The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 trans-

ferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred

Songs for Lessons” on page 46.

035 Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01–16 02

Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson.

The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 trans-

ferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred

Songs for Lessons” on page 46.

036 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON

Determines whether the song playback tempo matches the

speed at which you are playing (ON) or not (OFF), when using

the “Waiting” Lesson mode.

Demo

037 Demo Group DemoGrp

1 DEMO

2 Preset

3 User

4 Download

1 DEMO Determines the repeat playback group.

038 Demo Play Mode PlayMode

1 Normal

2 Random

1 Normal Determines the repeat playback mode.

039 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF OFF

Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this

is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/

BGM] button is pressed.

Power Save

040 Auto Power Off AutoOff

OFF/5/10/15/

30/60/120

(minutes)

Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s

power is automatically turned off.

No. Item Display

Range/

settings

Default

setting

Description

• Song Out, Style Out and Key-

board Out can only be

changed by the PC setting.

They cannot be set indepen-

dently. Song Out can be used

with User Songs.

NOTE

PC1 PC2 OFF

LOCAL Off Off On

EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off

SONG OUT* Off Off On

STYLE OUT** Off Off On

KEYBOARD OUT*** Off On On

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Connecting to a Computer

This instrument can be connected to a computer to allow transfer of MIDI data or a file.

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a world-standard interface for communi-

cation between electronic musical instruments and music devices.

MIDI settings such as Local Control are made in the Function settings (page 42 Func-

tion 027–030).

Turn off the power of the instrument before connecting a USB cable.

Turn on the power of the computer.

Quit any open application software on the computer.

Connect the instrument and the computer via a USB cable.

Turn on the power of the instrument.

When you connect the instrument to a computer for the first time, the driver is installed automatically.

Operating System (OS)

Windows XP (SP3 or later)/Windows Vista *Only 32-bit, Windows 7, Mac OS X Version 10.5.0–10.6.x

When data communication is unstable or some problem occurs even though you’ve executed the above

instructions, download the Yamaha Standard USBMIDI driver from the following URL then install it to your

computer. For instructions on installation, refer to the Install Guide included in the package file.

http://download.yamaha.com/

For details about OS for Yamaha Standard USB-MIDI driver, visit the URL above.

 Precautions when using the USB terminal

When connecting the computer to the USB terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so

risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the

application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again.

Connecting a Personal Computer

USB cable

USB terminal

Instrument

USB terminal

NOTICE

• Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used.

• Before connecting the computer to the USB terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspend, sleep,

standby).

• Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB terminal.

• Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB terminal.

• Quit any open application software on the computer.

• Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or

playing back a song.)

• While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turn-

ing the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable.

Connecting to a Computer

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

This instrument includes 102 preset Songs and 106 Styles, but you can load other Songs and Styles from your

computer and use them in the same way as the preset Songs and Styles as long as the loaded Song is SMF format

0* or the loaded Style is SFF (Style File Format). Loaded Song data will be stored to Song numbers beginning

with 108 and one of the loaded Style/s can be registered as the 107th Style. In order to perform the operations

described in this section you will need to use a computer connected to the Internet to download the free Musicsoft

Downloader application.

* The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing

sequence data. Most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0.

Installing Musicsoft Downloader

You can download the “Musicsoft Downloader” application from the following web-

site. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection.

http://download.yamaha.com/

Please visit the URL above to get the information on the computer system require-

ments for Musicsoft Downloader.

Transferring Data by using the Musicsoft Downloader

You can transmit Song files and Style Files from your computer to the Flash Mem-

ory on your instrument by Musicsoft Downloader.

You can also transfer backup data (page 40) other than the “Passing status of Song

and Step” to a computer as a backup file.

For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions see the Help menu: launch the

Musicsoft Downloader application and click “Help.”

Transferring data between the instrument and a computer

• Visit the Yamaha website for

more information on the latest

version of Musicsoft Down-

loader (version 5.6.1 or

higher) and how to install it.

NOTE

• The Musicsoft Downloader

application may not be able

to access the instrument in

the following cases:

• During Style playback

• During Song playback

• Use the power adaptor

when transferring data.

The data can be corrupted

if the batteries fail during

the transfer.

• Never turn the power off

and never plug/unplug the

AC power adaptor during

data transmission. Not

only will the data fail to be

transferred and saved, but

operation of the flash

memory may become

unstable and its contents

may disappear completely

when the power is turned

on or off.

• Close the window to exit from

the Musicsoft Downloader

and re-enable control of the

instrument.

NOTE

NOTICE

NOTE

Data that can be loaded to this instrument from a computer

• Songs : 256 Songs max (Song numbers 108–)

• Data : Approx. 1.7MB

• Data Format : SMF Format 0 and 1

• File : 11PK3.BUP (Backup file)

***.mid (MIDI Song)

***.sty (Style File)

Musicsoft Downloader Operations

Move the file from the computer to “Flash Memory” under “Electronic Musical

Instruments.”

Connecting to a Computer

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

This instrument features 106 internal Styles, but other Styles, such as those which can be obtained from the inter-

net (only Styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be registered to Style number 107 and used in the same way as the

internal Styles.

In order to use the Style File register function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to the

instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 45

(“Transferring data between the instrument and a computer”). The procedure described below registers a Style file

that has already been transferred from a computer to the instrument to Style number 107.

Press the [FUNCTION] button as many times as neces-

sary to select the Style File Load function “StyleReg”

(Function 007).

After about 2 seconds the name of a registerable Style file will appear in the dis-

play. If multiple loadable Style files have been transferred to the instrument, you

can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in sequence.

Execute the register operation.

With the name of the Style file you want to register shown in the dis-

play, press the number [0] button.

A confirmation message for the register operation will

appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually register the file.

• Preset Song data cannot be

transmitted from this instru-

ment

• “Passing status of Song and

Step” cannot be transferred

from this instrument as a

“backup file.”

• The backup data, including

the five User Songs is

transmitted/received as a

single file. As a result, all

backup data (including the

five Songs) will be over-

written every time you

transmit or receive. Keep

this in mind when transfer-

ring data.

• Do not rename the backup

file on the computer. If you

do so, it will not be recog-

nized when transferred to

the instrument.

NOTE

NOTICE

Data that can be transferred to a computer from this instrument

• Backup file (11PK3.BUP: backup data containing five User Songs)

• Songs transferred from a computer

Musicsoft Downloader Operations

Move the file from “System Drive” under “Electronic Musical Instruments” to

the computer.

Erasing Transferred Song Data from Internal Memory

To erase all Songs transferred from the computer, use the “Deleting Files” func-

tion on page 40. To erase specific Songs transferred from the computer, use the

Delete function on Musicsoft Downloader.

Using Transferred Songs for Lessons

In order to use Songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for les-

sons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the right-

hand and left-hand parts. Refer to the “Lesson Track (R)” or “Lesson Track (L)”

in the Function Setting List on page 43. The procedure for setting the guide track

is as follows: Select a transferred Song you want to use for lessons. Press the

[FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “R-Part” or “L-Part” appears

in the display, and then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the

channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We rec-

ommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the

left-hand part.

Registering Style Files

StyleReg

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause and Solution

When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping

sound is temporarily produced.

This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power.

When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce inter-

ference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from

the instrument.

There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or

when a song or style is being played back.

Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear

panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output.

Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 42 Function 028.)

Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems

to be cut off.

The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes — including Dual

voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome.

Notes exceeding this limit will not sound.

Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does

not produce any sound.

When using the Dictionary function (page 22), the keys in the right hand area

are used only for entering the chord root and type.

The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/

STOP] button is pressed.

Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to

“Function Settings” on page 42 (Function 029).

The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the

[ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed.

Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Style-

related function.

The Style does not sound properly.

Make sure that the Style Volume (page 41 Function 001) is set to an appropri-

ate level.

Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set

the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 41 Function 005).

Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press

the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show.

• The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords

are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the minor sev-

enth).

• Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played

chord.

• Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompani-

ment based only on the root.

The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the oppo-

site effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off

the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds.

The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is

properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power.

The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings

(samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual

sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note.

The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the

selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it

by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then

play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types

06–26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is nec-

essary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12.

• The volume is too soft.

• The sound quality is poor.

• The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play.

• The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play cor-

rectly.

• The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel

settings are reset.

The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new

ones, or use the optional AC adaptor.

Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated

(page 9). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in the

Function settings (page 43 Function 040).

Appendix

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Song Book Sample

This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores).

The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3) but also music terms and impor-

tant points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website.

* The Song book is provided in English, French, German and Spanish.

This example introduces part of the English song book.

Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

Für Elise

Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite.

The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times.

In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up!

First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself!

Für Elise With Step Map

.......................................................................12

Song No.004

Basic

Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ....................................14

Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 15

Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” .....................................16

Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 16

First Half Review ...................................................................... 17

Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 17

Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” .................................... 18

“EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18

“Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19

Second Half Review ................................................................... 19

Play the Whole Song! ................................................................. 19

L. v. Beethoven

Song Book Sample

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Before Playing...

Sit Correctly Finger Numbering

Left Right

Sit near the middle of the keyboard.

Reading the Score

The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef

BDEFGACBDEFGA BDCEFGAC BDEFGACBDEFGACC

Treble clef

Bass clef

Time Signatures and Counting Time

4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time

3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time

1 octave

2 black keys 3 black keys

Accidentals



(Sharp) Raise a semitone

B

(Flat) Lower a semitone

N

(Natural) Return to normal pitch

Key signature

Clef

Time signature

Notes and Rests

Whole note

Dotted half note

Half note

Dotted quarter note

Quarter note

Eighth note

Sixteenth note





Whole note rest

Dotted half note rest

Half note rest

Dotted quarter note rest

Quarter note rest

Eighth note rest

Sixteenth note rest

























1234

Song Book Sample

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004

Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play.

Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as

you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proﬁciency.

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

With Step Map

From here...

Song Book Sample

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

...to here From here...

...to here

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

Song Book Sample

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery”

Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three ﬁngers of the right hand.

We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the

illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get

started!

You’ll ﬁnd it easier to play if you bend your ﬁngers slightly.

Right

Tip-toe

ABCD

A E

Go back to the beginning and play it again.

Song Book Sample

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

Diligent Practice Time

Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time.

The melody will be built up little by little.

Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar.

Short break

Almost done

Song Book Sample

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”

And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand.

It’s important to spread your ﬁngers widely from the start.

Don’t play the black keys too strongly.

Left hand

AEAE

Diligent Practice Time

Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play

smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it ﬁnishes playing the ﬁrst

phrase.

Song Book Sample

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

Diligent Practice Time

OK, let’s begin the second half!

You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your ﬁngers from the keyboard between the slurs.

It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody.

Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes.

First Half Review

You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps?

Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble

playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide.

Always have left-hand ﬁnger 5 ready to play the next note!

Song Book Sample

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

EEE

Jump to the

next E!

And again!

Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition”

The ﬁrst note has a staccato dot.

Spread your ﬁngers wide and jump quickly to the next note!

Left hand

“EEEEE!”

The only note in this step is E!

Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible.

Song Book Sample

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Song No.004 Für Elise Basic

Left

Right

Für Elise

Song No.004

Basic

“Left! Right! Left! Right!”

Play “D



E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands.

Have the next hand ready in position to play D



so you won’t have to rush.

Second Half Review

Try playing all the way through the second half.

As we did after the ﬁrst half, if there are places you can’t play with conﬁdence go back and review the steps.

Play the Whole Song!

This is the ﬁnishing step!

Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish.

Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song.

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Voice List

Panel Voice List

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PIANO

1 0 112 1 Grand Piano

2 0 112 2 Bright Piano

3 0 112 7 Harpsichord

4 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano

5 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano

601133CP 80

E.PIANO

7 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano

8 0 113 6 Hyper Tines

9 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano

10 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano

11 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano

12 0 112 8 Clavi

ORGAN

13 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1

14 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2

15 0 112 19 Rock Organ

16 0 114 19 Purple Organ

17 0 112 18 Click Organ

18 0 116 17 Bright Organ

19 0 127 19 Theater Organ

20 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ

21 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ

22 0 113 20 Chapel Organ

23 0 112 20 Pipe Organ

24 0 112 21 Reed Organ

ACCORDION

25 0 112 22 Musette Accordion

26 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion

27 0 113 24 Bandoneon

28 0 112 23 Harmonica

GUITAR

29 0 112 25 Classical Guitar

30 0 112 26 Folk Guitar

31 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar

32 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar

33 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar

34 0 112 28 Clean Guitar

35 0 113 27 Octave Guitar

36 0 112 29 Muted Guitar

37 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar

38 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar

BASS

39 0 112 34 Finger Bass

40 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass

41 0 112 35 Pick Bass

42 0 112 36 Fretless Bass

43 0 112 37 Slap Bass

44 0 112 39 Synth Bass

45 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass

46 0 113 40 Dance Bass

STRINGS

47 0 112 49 String Ensemble

48 0 112 50 Chamber Strings

49 0 113 50 Slow Strings

50 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings

51 0 112 51 Synth Strings

52 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings

53 0 112 41 Violin

54 0 112 43 Cello

55 0 112 44 Contrabass

56 0 112 47 Harp

57 0 112 106 Banjo

58 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit

CHOIR

59 0 112 53 Choir

60 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble

61 0 112 55 Air Choir

62 0 112 54 Vox Humana

SAXOPHONE

63 0 112 67 Tenor Sax

64 0 112 66 Alto Sax

65 0 112 65 Soprano Sax

66 0 112 68 Baritone Sax

67 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

68 0 112 72 Clarinet

69 0 112 69 Oboe

70 0 112 70 English Horn

71 0 112 71 Bassoon

TRUMPET

72 0 112 57 Trumpet

73 0 112 58 Trombone

74 0 113 58 Trombone Section

75 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet

76 0 112 61 French Horn

77 0 112 59 Tuba

BRASS

78 0 112 62 Brass Section

79 0 113 62 Big Band Brass

80 0 113 63 80’s Brass

81 0 119 62 Mellow Horns

82 0 114 63 Techno Brass

83 0 112 63 Synth Brass

FLUTE

84 0 112 74 Flute

85 0 112 73 Piccolo

86 0 112 76 Pan Flute

87 0 112 75 Recorder

88 0 112 80 Ocarina

SYNTH

89 0 112 81 Square Lead

90 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead

91 0 115 82 Analogon

92 0 119 82 Fargo

93 0 112 99 Star Dust

94 0 112 86 Voice Lead

95 0 112 101 Brightness

96 0 112 92 Xenon Pad

97 0 112 95 Equinox

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Nam e

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Maximum Polyphony

The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This

means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once,

regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment

uses a number of the available notes, so when auto

accompaniment is used the total number of available notes

for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The

same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the

maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will

be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note

priority).

• The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each

voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the

instrument via MIDI from an external device.

• Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program

Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Pro-

gram Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take

this into consideration.

• Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after

the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch)

is held.

NOTE

Voice List

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

* When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices

sound at the same time. The Voice whose MIDI program

change number is indicated in the Voice List is known as the

Main Voice.

XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List

98 0 112 89 Fantasia

99 0 113 90 Dark Moon

100 0 113 101 Bell Pad

PERCUSSION

101 0 112 12 Vibraphone

102 0 112 13 Marimba

103 0 112 14 Xylophone

104 0 112 115 Steel Drums

105 0 112 9 Celesta

106 0 112 11 Music Box

107 0 112 15 Tubular Bells

108 0 112 48 Timpani

WORLD

109 0 115 111 Er Hu

110 0 117 74 Di Zi

111 0 116 106 P i Pa

112 0 0 105 S itar

113 0 0 16 Dulcimer

114 0 98 106 Oud

115 0 0 107 Shamisen

116 0 113 108 GuZheng

117 0 0 108 Koto

118 0 0 109 K a limba

119 0 0 110 Bagpipe

120 0 0 111 Fiddle

121 0 0 112 Shanai

122 126 0 128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc.

DUAL*

123 0 112 1 Octave Piano

124 0 112 1 Piano + Strings

125 0 112 1 Piano Pad

126 0 0 6 E.P. Pad

127 0 0 49 Octave Strings

128 0 0 62 Octave Brass

129 0 0 49 Orchestra Tutti

130 0 0 53 Octave Choir

131 0 0 62 Jazz Section

132 0 0 74 Flute & Clarinet

SOUND EFFECTS

1330 0121Fret Noise

1340 0122Breath Noise

135 0 0 123 Seashore

1360 0124Bird Tweet

137 0 0 125 Telephone Ring

138 0 0 126 Helicopter

139 0 0 127 Applause

140 0 0 128 Gunshot

DRUM KITS

141 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1

142 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2

143 127 0 9 Room Kit

144 127 0 17 Rock Kit

145 127 0 25 Electronic Kit

146 127 0 26 Analog Kit

147 127 0 113 Dance Kit

148 127 0 33 Jazz Kit

149 127 0 41 Brush Kit

150 127 0 49 Symphony Kit

151 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1

152 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2

153 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Nam e

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

XG PIANO

154 0 0 1 Grand Piano

155 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP

156 0 40 1 Piano Strings

157 0 41 1 Dream

158 0 0 2 Bright Piano

159 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP

160 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano

161 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP

162 0 32 3 Detuned CP80

163 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano

164 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP

165 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1

166 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP

167 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1

168 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2

169 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP

*170 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2

171 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano

172 0 0 7 Harpsichord

173 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP

174 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2

175 0 0 8 Clavi

176 0 1 8 Clavi KSP

XG CHROMATIC

177 0 0 9 Celesta

178 0 0 10 Glockenspiel

179 0 0 11 Music Box

180 0 64 11 Orgel

181 0 0 12 Vibraphone

182 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP

183 0 0 13 Marimba

184 0 1 13 Marimba KSP

185 0 64 13 Sine Marimba

186 0 97 13 Balimba

187 0 98 13 Log Drums

188 0 0 14 Xylophone

189 0 0 15 Tubular Bells

190 0 96 15 Church Bells

191 0 97 15 Carillon

192 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2

193 0 96 16 Cimbalom

194 0 97 16 Santur

XG ORGAN

195 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ

196 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ

197 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1

198 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2

199 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1

200 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3

201 0 40 17 16+2'2/3

202 0 64 17 Organ Bass

203 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2

204 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ

205 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2

206 0 0 18 Percussive Organ

207 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ

208 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ

209 0 33 18 Light Organ

210 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2

211 0 0 19 Rock Organ

212 0 64 19 Rotary Organ

213 0 65 19 Slow Rotary

214 0 66 19 Fast Rotary

215 0 0 20 Church Organ

216 0 32 20 Church Organ 3

217 0 35 20 Church Organ 2

218 0 40 20 Notre Dame

219 0 64 20 Organ Flute

220 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute

221 0 0 21 Reed Organ

Voice List

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

222 0 40 21 Puff Organ

223 0 0 22 Accordion

224 0 0 23 Harmonica

225 0 32 23 Harmonica 2

226 0 0 24 Tango Accordion

227 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2

XG GUITAR

228 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar

229 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics

230 0 96 25 Ukulele

231 0 0 26 Steel Guitar

232 0 35 26 12-string Guitar

233 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar

234 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound

235 0 96 26 Mandolin

236 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar

237 0 32 27 Jazz Amp

238 0 0 28 Clean Guitar

239 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar

240 0 0 29 Muted Guitar

241 0 40 29 Funk Guitar

242 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar

243 0 45 29 Jazz Man

244 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar

245 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch

246 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar

247 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar

248 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2

249 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics

250 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback

251 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2

XG BASS

252 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass

253 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm

254 0 45 33

Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass

255 0 0 34 Finger Bass

256 0 18 34 Finger Dark

257 0 40 34

Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar

258 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass

259 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2

260 0 65 34 Modulated Bass

261 0 0 35 Pick Bass

262 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass

263 0 0 36 Fretless Bass

264 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2

265 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3

266 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4

267 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1

268 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass

269 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2

270 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap

271 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1

272 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass

273 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2

274 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass

275 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass

276 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass

277 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark

*278 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass

279 0 41 40 DX Bass

XG STRINGS

280 0 0 41 Violin

281 0 8 41 Slow Violin

282 0 0 42 Viola

283 0 0 43 Cello

284 0 0 44 Contrabass

285 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings

286 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings

287 0 40 45 Suspense Strings

288 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings

289 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp

290 0 40 47 Yang Chin

291 0 0 48 Timpani

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

XG ENSEMBLE

292 0 0 49 Strings 1

293 0 3 49 Stereo Strings

294 0 8 49 Slow Strings

295 0 35 49 60’s Strings

296 0 40 49 Orchestra

297 0 41 49 Orchestra 2

298 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra

299 0 45 49 Velocity Strings

300 0 0 50 Strings 2

301 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings

302 0 8 50 Legato Strings

303 0 40 50 Warm Strings

304 0 41 50 Kingdom

305 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1

306 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2

307 0 0 53 Choir Aahs

308 0 3 53 Stereo Choir

309 0 32 53 Mellow Choir

310 0 40 53 Choir Strings

311 0 0 54 Voice Oohs

312 0 0 55 Synth Voice

313 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2

314 0 41 55 Choral

315 0 64 55 Analog Voice

316 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit

317 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2

318 0 64 56 Impact

XG BRASS

319 0 0 57 Trumpet

320 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet

321 0 0 58 Trombone

322 0 18 58 Trombone 2

323 0 0 59 Tuba

324 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet

325 0 0 61 French Horn

326 0 6 61 French Horn Solo

327 0 32 61 French Horn 2

328 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra

329 0 0 62 Brass Section

330 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section

331 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1

332 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass

333 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2

334 0 18 64 Soft Brass

335 0 41 64 Choir Brass

XG REED

336 0 0 65 Soprano Sax

337 0 0 66 Alto Sax

338 0 40 66 Sax Section

339 0 0 67 Tenor Sax

340 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax

341 0 0 68 Baritone Sax

342 0 0 69 Oboe

343 0 0 70 English Horn

344 0 0 71 Bassoon

345 0 0 72 Clarinet

XG PIPE

346 0 0 73 Piccolo

347 0 0 74 Flute

348 0 0 75 Recorder

349 0 0 76 Pan Flute

350 0 0 77 Blown Bottle

351 0 0 78 Shakuhachi

352 0 0 79 Whistle

353 0 0 80 Ocarina

XG SYNTH LEAD

354 0 0 81 Square Lead

355 0 6 81 Square Lead 2

356 0 8 81 LM Square

357 0 18 81 Hollow

358 0 19 81 Shroud

359 0 64 81 Mellow

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Nam e

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

Voice List

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional

voice.

360 0 65 81 Solo Sine

361 0 66 81 Sine Lead

362 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead

363 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2

364 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth

365 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth

366 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth

367 0 20 82 Big Lead

368 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog

369 0 0 83 Calliope Lead

370 0 65 83 Pure Lead

371 0 0 84 Chiff Lead

372 0 0 85 Charang Lead

373 0 64 85 Distorted Lead

374 0 0 86 Voice Lead

375 0 0 87 Fifths Lead

376 0 35 87 Big Five

377 0 0 88 Bass & Lead

378 0 16 88 Big & Low

379 0 64 88 Fat & Perky

380 0 65 88 Soft Whirl

XG SYNTH PAD

381 0 0 89 New Age Pad

382 0 64 89 Fantasy

383 0 0 90 Warm Pad

384 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad

385 0 0 92 Choir Pad

386 0 66 92 Itopia

387 0 0 93 Bowed Pad

388 0 0 94 Metallic Pad

389 0 0 95 Halo Pad

390 0 0 96 Sweep Pad

XG SYNTH EFFECTS

391 0 0 97 Rain

392 0 65 97 African Wind

393 0 66 97 Carib

394 0 0 98 Sound Track

395 0 27 98 Prologue

396 0 0 99 Crystal

397 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp

398 0 14 99 Popcorn

399 0 18 99 Tiny Bells

400 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel

401 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes

402 0 41 99 Clear Bells

403 0 42 99 Chorus Bells

404 0 65 99 Soft Crystal

405 0 70 99 Air Bells

406 0 71 99 Bell Harp

407 0 72 99 Gamelimba

408 0 0 100 Atmosphere

409 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere

410 0 19 100 Hollow Release

411 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano

412 0 64 100 Nylon Harp

413 0 65 100 Harp Vox

414 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad

415 0 0 101 Brightness

4160 0102Goblins

417 0 64 102 Goblins Synth

418 0 65 102 Creeper

419 0 67 102 Ritual

420 0 68 102 To Heaven

421 0 70 102 Night

422 0 71 102 Glisten

423 0 96 102 Bell Choir

424 0 0 103 Echoes

425 0 0 104 Sci-Fi

XG WORLD

426 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar

427 0 35 105 Sitar 2

428 0 97 105 Tamboura

429 0 0 106 Banjo

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Name

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

430 0 28 106 Muted Banjo

431 0 96 106 Rabab

432 0 97 106 Gopichant

433 0 96 108 Taisho-kin

434 0 97 108 Kanoon

XG PERCUSSIVE

435 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell

436 0 96 113 Bonang

437 0 97 113 Altair

438 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs

439 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs

440 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal

441 0 0 114 Agogo

442 0 0 115 Steel Drums

443 0 97 115 Glass Percussion

444 0 98 115 Thai Bells

445 0 0 116 Woodblock

446 0 96 116 Castanets

447 0 0 117 Taiko Drum

448 0 96 117 Gran Cassa

449 0 0 118 Melodic Tom

450 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2

451 0 65 118 Real Tom

452 0 66 118 Rock Tom

453 0 0 119 Synth Drum

454 0 64 119 Analog Tom

455 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion

456 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal

XG SOUND EFFECTS

457 64 0 1 Cutting Noise

458 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2

459 64 0 4 String Slap

460 64 0 17 Flute Key Click

461 64 0 33 Shower

462 64 0 34 Thunder

463 64 0 35 Wind

464 64 0 36 Stream

465 64 0 37 Bubble

466 64 0 38 Feed

467 64 0 49 Dog

468 64 0 50 Horse

469 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2

470 64 0 56 Maou

471 64 0 65 Phone Call

472 64 0 66 Door Squeak

473 64 0 67 Door Slam

474 64 0 68 Scratch Cut

475 64 0 69 Scratch Split

476 64 0 70 Wind Chime

477 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2

478 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition

479 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal

480 64 0 83 Car Passing

481 64 0 84 Car Crash

482 64 0 85 Siren

483 64 0 86 Train

484 64 0 87 Jet Plane

485 64 0 88 Starship

486 64 0 89 Burst

487 64 0 90 Roller Coaster

488 64 0 91 Submarine

489 64 0 97 Laugh

490 64 0 98 Scream

491 64 0 99 Punch

492 64 0 100 Heartbeat

493 64 0 101 Footsteps

494 64 0 113 Machine Gun

495 64 0 114 Laser Gun

496 64 0 115 Explosion

497 64 0 116 Firework

Voice

No.

Bank Select

MIDI

Program

Change#

(1–128)

Voice Nam e

MSB

(0–127)

LSB

(0–127)

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Drum Kit List

• “ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “141: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H”

(Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0).

• Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released.

• Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.)

Voice No. 141 142 143 144 145 146

MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) 127/000/001 127/000/002 127/000/009 127/000/017 127/000/025 127/000/026

Keyboard MIDI

Key

Off

Alternate

Group

Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit

Note# Note Note# Note

25 C# 013C# -1 3 Surdo Mute

26 D 0 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open

27 D# 015D# -1 Hi Q

28 E 0 16 E -1 Whip Slap

29 F 0 17 F -1 4 Scratch Push

30 F# 018F# -1 4 Scratch Pull

31 G 0 19 G -1 Finger Snap

32 G# 020G# -1 Click Noise

33 A 0 21 A -1 Metronome Click

34 A# 022A# -1 Metronome Bell

35 B 0 23 B -1 Seq Click L

36 C 1 24 C 0 Seq Click H

37 C# 125C# 0 Brush Tap

38 D 1 26 D 0 O Brush Swirl

39 D# 127D# 0Brush Slap

40 E 1 28 E 0 O Brush Tap Swirl Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

41 F 1 29 F 0 O Snare Roll

42 F# 130F# 0 Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

43 G 1 31 G 0 Snare H Soft Snare H Soft 2

SD Rock H Snare L SD Rock H

44 G# 132G# 0Sticks

45 A 1 33 A 0 Bass Drum Soft Bass Drum H Bass Drum H

46 A# 134A# 0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2

47 B 1 35 B 0 Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum H BD Rock BD Analog L

48 C 2 36 C 1 Bass Drum Bass Drum 2

BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog H

49 C# 237C# 1Side Stick

Analog Side Stick

50 D 2 38 D 1 Snare M Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L Analog Snare 1

51 D# 239D# 1 Hand Clap

52 E 2 40 E 1 Snare H Hard Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H SD Rock Rim SD Rock H Analog Snare 2

53 F 2 41 F 1 Floor Tom L

Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1 Analog Tom 1

54 F# 242F# 1 1 Hi-Hat Closed

Analog HH Closed 1

55 G 2 43 G 1 Floor Tom H

Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Analog Tom 2

56 G# 244G# 1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal

Analog HH Closed 2

57 A 2 45 A 1 Low Tom

Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Analog Tom 3

58 A# 246A# 11Hi-Hat Open

Analog HH Open

59 B 2 47 B 1 Mid Tom L

Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E Tom 4 Analog Tom 4

60 C 3 48 C 2 Mid Tom H

Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 5 Analog Tom 5

61 C# 349C# 2 Crash Cymbal 1

Analog Cymbal

62 D 3 50 D 2 High Tom

Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Tom 6

63 D# 351D# 2 Ride Cymbal 1

64 E 3 52 E 2 Chinese Cymbal

65 F 3 53 F 2 Ride Cymbal Cup

66 F# 354F# 2 Tambourine

67 G 3 55 G 2 Splash Cymbal

68 G# 356G# 2Cowbell Analog Cowbell

69 A 3 57 A 2 Crash Cymbal 2

70 A# 358A# 2Vibraslap

71 B 3 59 B 2 Ride Cymbal 2

72 C 4 60 C 3 Bongo H

73 C# 461C# 3 Bongo L

74 D 4 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Analog Conga H

75 D# 463D# 3 Conga H Open

Analog Conga M

76 E 4 64 E 3 Conga L

Analog Conga L

77 F 4 65 F 3 Timbale H

78 F# 466F# 3Timbale L

79 G 4 67 G 3 Agogo H

80 G# 468G# 3 Agogo L

81 A 4 69 A 3 Cabasa

82 A# 470A# 3 Maracas Analog Maracas

83 B 4 71 B 3 O Samba Whistle H

84 C 5 72 C 4 O Samba Whistle L

85 C# 573C# 4Guiro Short

86 D 5 74 D 4 O Guiro Long

87 D# 575D# 4Claves Analog Claves

88 E 5 76 E 4 Wood Block H

89 F 5 77 F 4 Wood Block L

90 F# 578F# 4Cuica Mute Scratch Push Scratch Push

91 G 5 79 G 4 Cuica Open

Scratch Pull Scratch Pull

92 G# 580G# 4 2 Triangle Mute

93 A 5 81 A 4 2 Triangle Open

94 A# 582A# 4Shaker

95 B 5 83 B 4 Jingle Bell

96 C 6 84 C 5 Bell Tree

97 C# 685C# 5

98 D 6 86 D 5

99 D# 687D# 5

100 E 6 88 E 5

101 F 6 89 F 5

102 F# 690F# 5

103 G 6 91 G 5

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

Drum Kit List

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

147 148 149 150 122 151 152 153

127/000/113 127/000/033 127/000/041 127/000/049 126/000/128 126/000/001 126/000/002 126/000/113

Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit

Alternate

Group

StdKit1 +

Chinese Perc.

SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Sound Effect Kit

Drum Loop

Reverse Cymbal

Hi Q 2

AnSD Snappy SD Jazz H Light Brush Slap L

AnBD Dance-1 Bass Drum L

AnSD OpenRim

AnBD Dance-2 Gran Cassa

AnBD Dance-3 BD Jazz BD Jazz Gran Cassa Mute Cutting Noise Phone Call Heartbeat

Analog Side Stick

Cutting Noise 2 Door Squeak Footsteps

AnSD Q SD Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Sn M

Door Slam Door Squeak

String Slap Scratch Cut Door Slam

AnSD Ana+Acoustic SD Jazz M Brush Tap Marching Sn H

Scratch Applause

An alo g To m 1 Ja zz Tom 1 Bru sh Tom 1 J az z To m 1

Wind Chime Camera

Analog HH Closed 3

Telephone Ring 2 Horn

An alo g To m 2 Ja zz Tom 2 Bru sh Tom 2 J az z To m 2

Hiccup

Analog HH Closed 4

Cuckoo Clock

An alo g To m 3 Ja zz Tom 3 Bru sh Tom 3 J az z To m 3

Stream

Analog HH Open 2

Frog

An alo g To m 4 Ja zz Tom 4 Bru sh Tom 4 J az z To m 4

Rooster

An alo g To m 5 Ja zz Tom 5 Bru sh Tom 5 J az z To m 5

Dog

Analog Cymbal

Hand Cym. L Cat

An alo g To m 6 Ja zz Tom 6 Bru sh Tom 6 J az z To m 6

Owl

Hand Cym.Short L Horse Gallop

Flute Key Click Car Engine Ignition Horse Neigh

Car Tires Squeal Cow

Car Passing Lion

Car Crash Scratch

Analog Cowbell

Siren Yo!

Hand Cym. H Tra in G o!

Jet Plane Get up!

Hand Cym.Short H Starship Whoow!

Burst

Huuaah!

Roller Coaster

Analog Conga H

Submarine

Analog Conga M

Analog Conga L

4 Dagu Mute

5 Zhongcha Mute Shower Laugh

4 Dagu Heavy Thunder Scream

Analog Maracas

5 Zhongcha Open Wind Punch

Paigu Middle Stream Heartbeat

Paigu Low Bubble Footsteps

Uh!+Hit

6 Xiaocha Mute Feed

Bangu

Analog Claves

6 Xiaocha Open

Bangzi

Muyu Low

Scratch Push

7 Zhongluo Mute

Scratch Pull

Muyu Mid-Low

7 Zhongluo Open

Muyu Middle

Xiaoluo Open

Triangle Mute

Triangle Open Dog Machine Gun

Horse Laser Gun Applause 1

Bird Tweet 2 Explosion Applause 2

Firework Applause 3

Applause 4

Maou

F#1

G#1

A#1

D#1

C#1

F#2

G#2

A#2

D#2

C#2

F#3

G#3

A#3

D#3

C#3

F#4

G#4

A#4

D#4

C#4

F#5

G#5

A#5

D#5

C#5

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Style List

Style No. Style Name

8 BEAT

001 8BeatModern

002 60’sGtrPop

003 8BeatAdria

004 60’s8Beat

005 8Beat

006 OffBeat

007 60’sRock

008 HardRock

009 RockShuffle

010 8BeatRock

16 BEAT

011 16Beat

012 PopShuffle

013 GuitarPop

014 16BtUptempo

015 KoolShuffle

016 HipHopLight

BALLAD

017 PianoBallad

018 LoveSong

019 6/8ModernEP

020 6/8SlowRock

021 OrganBallad

022 PopBallad

023 16BeatBallad

DANCE

024 EuroTrance

025 Ibiza

026 SwingHouse

027 Clubdance

028 ClubLatin

029 Garage1

030 Garage2

031 TechnoParty

032 UKPop

033 HipHopGroove

034 HipShuffle

035 HipHopPop

DISCO

036 70’sDisco

037 LatinDisco

038 SaturdayNight

039 DiscoHands

SWING & JAZZ

040 BigBandFast

041 BigBandBallad

042 JazzClub

043 Swing1

044 Swing2

045 Five/Four

046 Dixieland

047 Ragtime

R & B

048 Soul

049 DetroitPop

050 6/8Soul

051 CrocoTwist

052 Rock&Roll

053 ComboBoogie

054 6/8Blues

COUNTRY

055 CountryPop

056 CountrySwing

057 Country2/4

058 Bluegrass

LATIN

059 BrazilianSamba

060 BossaNova

061 Forro

062 Tijuana

063 Mambo

064 Salsa

065 Beguine

066 Reggae

BALLROOM

067 VienneseWaltz

068 EnglishWaltz

069 Slowfox

070 Foxtrot

071 Quickstep

072 Tango

073 Pasodoble

074 Samba

075 ChaChaCha

076 Rumba

077 Jive

TRAD & WORLD

078 USMarch

079 6/8March

080 GermanMarch

081 PolkaPop

082 OberPolka

083 Tarantella

084 Showtune

085 ChristmasSwing

086 ChristmasWaltz

087 ScottishReel

WALTZ

088 SwingWaltz

089 JazzWaltz

090 CountryWaltz

091 OberWalzer

092 Musette

CHILDREN

093 Learning2/4

Style No. Style Name

094 Learning4/4

095 Learning6/8

096 Fun 3/4

097 Fun 4/4

PIANIST

098 Stride

099 PianoSwing

100 PianoBoogie

101 Arpeggio

102 Habanera

103 SlowRock

104 8BeatPianoBallad

105 6/8PianoMarch

106 PianoWaltz

Style No. Style Name

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Music Database List

MDB No. MDB Name

POP

1AlvFever

2DayPdise

3 GoMyWay

4 HowDeep!

5 HurryLuv

6 Imagine

7JustCall

8 SultanSw

9WhitePle

10 YesterPf

ROCK

11 JumpRock

12 PickUpPc

13 RdRiverR

14 SatsfyGt

15 Sheriff

16 SmokeWtr

17 TwistAgn

18 VenusPop

DANCE

19 2 of Us

20 B Leave

21 Back St

22 Crockett

23 FunkyTwn

24 KillSoft

25 Nine PM

26 SingBack

27 StrandD

BALLAD

28 AdelineB

29 CatMemry

30 ElvGhett

31 Feeling

32 Mn Rivr

33 OnMyMnd

34 OverRbow

35 ReleseMe

36 SavingLv

37 SmokyEye

38 WhisprSx

R & B

39 AmazingG

40 BoogiePf

41 Clock Rk

42 CU later

43 HappyDay

44 RisingSn

45 ShookUp

46 TeddyBer

SWING & JAZZ

47 ChooChoo

48 HighMoon

49 InMood

50 MistySax

51 MoonLit

52 New York

53 SaintMch

54 ShearJz

55 TstHoney

56 USPatrol

EASY LISTENING

57 Close2U

58 Entrtain

59 LuvStory

60 MyPrince

61 PupetStr

62 Raindrop

63 R'ticGtr

64 SingRain

65 SmallWld

66 SpkSoft

67 StrangeN

68 TimeGoes

69 WhteXmas

70 WishStar

71 WondrWld

LATIN

72 BambaLa

73 BeHappy!

74 CopaLola

75 DayNight

76 Ipanema

77 MuchoTrp

78 Sunshine

79 Tico Org

80 TrbWave

COUNTRY

81 BoxerFlt

82 CntryRds

83 Jambala

84 TopWorld

85 YlwRose

BALLROOM

86 BrazilBr

87 CherryTp

88 DanubeWv

89 TangoAc

90 Tea4Two

TRADITIONAL

91 CampRace

MDB No. MDB Name

92 CielPari

93 GrndClok

94 JinglBel

95 MickMrch

96 Showbiz

97 StarMrch

98 WashPost

99 XmasWalz

100 YankDood

MDB No. MDB Name

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Song List

• Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original.

• A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book, complete

the user registration at the following website.

https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/

Song No. Song Name

Top Picks

001 Demo 1 (Yamaha Original)

002 Demo 2 (Yamaha Original)

003 Demo 3 (Yamaha Original)

Learn to Play

004 Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)

005 Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)

006 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional)

007 Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional)

008 Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart)

009 Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart)

010 Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven)

011 Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven)

012 The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin)

013 The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin)

014 Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional)

015 Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional)

016 The Last Rose of Summer (Basic) (Traditional)

017 The Last Rose of Summer (Advanced) (Traditional)

018 Amazing Grace (Basic) (Traditional)

019 Amazing Grace (Advanced) (Traditional)

Favorite

020 Frère Jacques (Traditional)

021 Der Froschgesang (Traditional)

022 Aura Lee (Traditional)

023 London Bridge (Traditional)

024 Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional)

025 Nedelka (Traditional)

026 Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani)

027 Sippin’ Cider Through a Straw (Traditional)

028 Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster)

029 Bury Me Not on the Lone Prairie (Traditional)

030 Cielito Lindo (Traditional)

031 Santa Lucia (A. Longo)

032 If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional)

033 Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster)

034 Greensleeves (Traditional)

035 Kalinka (Traditional)

036 Holdilia Cook (Traditional)

037 Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster)

038 La Cucaracha (Traditional)

039 Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza)

040 Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák)

041 Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms)

042 Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt)

043 Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar)

044 Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet)

045 Jupiter, the Bringer of Jollity (G. Holst)

046 The Polovetsian Dances (A. Borodin)

047 Die Moldau (B. Smetana)

048 Salut d'Amour op.12 (E. Elgar)

049 Humoresques (A. Dvořák)

050

Symphony No.9 (from the New World - 4th movement) (A. Dvo

ák)

Favorite with Style

051 O du lieber Augustin (Traditional)

052 Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional)

053 When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball)

054 Little Brown Jug (Traditional)

055 Ten Little Indians (Traditional)

056 On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional)

057 My Darling Clementine (Traditional)

058 Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster)

059 Red River Valley (Traditional)

060 Turkey in the Straw (Traditional)

061 Muffin Man (R. A. King)

062 Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional)

063 Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work)

064 Camptown Races (S. C. Foster)

065 When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional)

066 Yankee Doodle (Traditional)

067 Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional)

068 I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional)

069 American Patrol (F. W. Meacham)

070 Down by the Riverside (Traditional)

Instrument Master

071 Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré)

072 Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky)

073 Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi)

074

Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48 (P. I. Tchaikovsky)

075 Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II)

076 Romance de Amor (Traditional)

077 Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach)

078 Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart)

079 Radetzky Marsch (J. Strauss I)

Piano Repertoire

080 Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional)

081 Die Lorelei (F. Silcher)

082 Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop)

083 Scarborough Fair (Traditional)

084 My Old Kentucky Home (Traditional)

085 Loch Lomond (Traditional)

086 Silent Night (F. Gruber)

087 Deck the Halls (Traditional)

088 O Christmas Tree (Traditional)

089

Sonata Pathétique 2nd Adagio Cantabile (L. v. Beethoven)

090

Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach / C. F. Gounod)

091 Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach)

092 Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin)

093 Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin)

094 Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin)

095 Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart)

096 Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller)

097 La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller)

098 Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven)

099 Turkish March (W.A. Mozart)

100 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin)

101 Annie Laurie (Traditional)

102 Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster)

Song No. Song Name

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Effect Type List

Harmony Types

Reverb Types

Chorus Types

No. Harmony Type Description

01 Duet

If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while

playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three

notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that

includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played.

02 Trio

03 Block

04 Country

05 Octave

06 Trill 1/4 note

If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously.

07 Trill 1/6 note

08 Trill 1/8 note

09 Trill 1/12 note

10 Trill 1/16 note

11 Trill 1/24 note

12 Trill 1/32 note

13 Tremolo 1/4 note

If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously.

(The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.)

14 Tremolo 1/6 note

15 Tremolo 1/8 note

16 Tremolo 1/12 note

17 Tremolo 1/16 note

18 Tremolo 1/24 note

19 Tremolo 1/32 note

20 Echo 1/4 note

If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played.

(The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.)

21 Echo 1/6 note

22 Echo 1/8 note

23 Echo 1/12 note

24 Echo 1/16 note

25 Echo 1/24 note

26 Echo 1/32 note

No. Reverb Type Description

01–03 Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb.

04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb.

06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments.

08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb.

10 Off No effect.

No. Chorus Type Description

01–02 Chorus 1–2 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

03–04 Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound.

05 Off No effect.

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Specifications

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify

products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please

check with your Yamaha dealer.

Size/Weight

Dimensions W x D x H 945 x 369 x 132 mm(37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 5-3/16”)

Weight 4.9kg (10 Ibs. 13 oz.) (not including batteries)

Keyboard

Number of Keys 61

Touch Response Yes

Display

Type LCD display

Backlit Yes

Language English

Panel Language English

Voices

Tone Generation Tone Generating Technology AWM Stereo Sampling

Polyphony Number of Polyphony (Max.) 32

Preset Number of Voices 140 panel voices + 13 drum/SFX kits + 344 XGlite voices

Compatibility GM/XGlite

Effects

Ty pes

Reverb 9 types

Chorus 4 types

Ultra-Wide Stereo 3 types

Harmony 26 types

Function

Dual Yes

Split Yes

Panel Sustain Yes

Accompaniment

Styles

Preset

Number of Preset Styles 106

Fingering Multi fingering

Style Control

ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit.,

MAIN/AUTO FILL

Custom User Styles Yes

Other Features

Music Database 100

One Touch Setting (OTS) Yes

Songs

Preset Number of Preset Songs 102

Recording

Number of Songs 5

Number of Tracks 2

Data Capacity

Approx. 10,000 notes (when only “melody” tracks are recorded)

Approx. 5,500 chords (when only “chord” tracks are recorded)

Recording Function Yes

Compatible Data

Format

Playback SMF

Recording Original File Format

Functions

Lesson

[1 LISTENING, 2 TIMING, 3 WAITING], [KEYS TO SUCCESS],

[PHRASE REPEAT], [CHORD DICTIONARY], [A-B REPEAT]

Overall Controls

Metronome Yes

Tempo Range 11 – 280

Transpose -12 – 0 – +12

Tuning 427.0 - 440.0 - 453.0 Hz

Miscellaneous Portable Grand Button Yes

Storage and

Connectivity

Internal Memory 1.7MB

Connectivity PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN, USB TO HOST, SUSTAIN

Amplifiers and

Speakers

Amplifiers 2.5W + 2.5W

Speakers 12cm x 2

Power Supply

• Adaptor: Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent

Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent

• Batteries:Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries

Power Consumption 7W (When using PA-130 power adaptor)

Auto Power Off Function Yes

Included Accessories

•Music Rest

• Owner’s Manual

• My Yamaha Product User Registration

• AC Power adaptor* (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)

* May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your

Yamaha dealer.

Optional Accessories

• Adaptor: Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent

Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent

• Footswitch: FC4/FC5

• Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L

• Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Index

A-B Repeat ..................................................................34

ACMP ON/OFF ..........................................................19

Auto Accompaniment ................................................19

Auto accompaniment range .......................................19

Auto Power Off .......................................................9, 43

Backup ...................................................................40, 45

Backup File ................................................................. 45

Battery ........................................................................... 8

Beat Display ................................................................13

BGM Playback ...........................................................26

Chord ...........................................................................21

Chord Dictionary ........................................................ 22

Chord Display .............................................................13

Chorus ................................................................... 17, 42

Chorus Send Level (Main, Dual and Split) ..............42

Chorus Type List ........................................................67

Computer .....................................................................44

DC IN ............................................................................8

Delete (File) ................................................................40

Delete (User Song) ..................................................... 39

Demo ...........................................................................26

Display ........................................................................13

Drum Kit .....................................................................14

Drum Kit List ..............................................................62

Dual .............................................................................17

Effect Type List ..........................................................67

Ending .........................................................................20

External Clock ............................................................ 42

FF .................................................................................27

Footswitch (Sustain jack) ............................................9

Function .......................................................................41

Function Setting List ............................................41–43

Grade ........................................................................... 32

Harmony ..................................................................... 16

Harmony Type List .................................................... 67

Harmony Volume ....................................................... 42

Headphones .................................................................. 9

Initial Send .................................................................. 43

Initialization ................................................................ 40

Intro ............................................................................. 20

KEYS TO SUCCESS ................................................ 28

Left .............................................................................. 32

Lesson ......................................................................... 28

Lesson Track R/L for transferred songs ............. 43, 46

Listening ..................................................................... 31

Local ............................................................................ 42

Main/Auto fill ............................................................. 20

Master EQ ..................................................................... 9

Master EQ Type ......................................................... 42

Master Volume Control ............................................... 9

Measure ....................................................................... 13

Melody Voice .............................................................. 27

Metronome .................................................................. 35

Metronome Volume ................................................... 43

MIDI ............................................................................ 42

Music Database .......................................................... 24

Music Rest .................................................................... 6

Musicsoft Downloader ............................................... 45

Mute ............................................................................ 34

Notation ...................................................................... 13

Octave (Main/Dual/Split) .......................................... 42

One Touch Setting (OTS) .......................................... 14

Option .......................................................................... 68

part ............................................................................... 32

Passing Status ....................................................... 13, 30

Pause ........................................................................... 27

Index

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

PC setting ....................................................................43

PHONES/OUTPUT .....................................................9

Phrase ..........................................................................33

Phrase Repeat ..............................................................33

PORTABLE GRAND ................................................15

Power Adaptor .............................................................. 8

Press and Hold for a while .........................................11

Recording ..............................................................36–38

Reverb ....................................................................17, 42

Reverb Level ...............................................................42

Reverb Type List ......................................................... 67

Rew ..............................................................................27

Rhythm ..................................................................12, 18

Right ............................................................................ 32

rit.(ritardando) .............................................................20

Root .......................................................................21–22

Save data to computer ................................................ 45

Section .........................................................................20

SMF Format ................................................................ 45

Song .......................................................................12, 25

Song Book ............................................................... 6, 48

Song List .....................................................................66

Song Volume ...............................................................41

Split ..............................................................................17

Split Point ..............................................................19, 41

START/STOP .............................................................12

Step .............................................................................. 28

Style .......................................................................12, 18

Style File ..................................................................... 46

Style List .....................................................................64

Style Volume ............................................................... 41

Supplied Accessories ............................................. 6, 68

Sustain (Footswitch) ..................................................... 9

Sustain (Panel) ......................................................17, 42

Synchro Start ..............................................................19

Tempo ..........................................................................35

TEMPO/TAP .............................................................. 35

Time Signature ...................................................... 35, 43

Timing ......................................................................... 31

Touch Response .......................................................... 15

Touch sensitivity ......................................................... 41

Track ................................................................13, 34, 37

Track Rec ..............................................................37–38

Transfer .......................................................................45

Transpose ....................................................................41

Tuning ......................................................................... 41

Ultra-Wide Stereo ...................................................... 15

USB ....................................................................... 10, 44

User Song .................................................................... 36

Vo i c e ...................................................................... 12, 14

Vo i c e L i s t .................................................................... 58

Volume (Main Voice/Dual Voice/Split Voice) ......... 42

Volume (Song) ............................................................ 41

Volume (Style) ............................................................ 41

Waiting ........................................................................ 31

XGlite ............................................................................ 6

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Memo

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should

not be mixed with general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with

your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC.

By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human

health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or

the point of sale where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the

correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical

involved.

(weee_battery_eu_en)

OBSERVERA!

Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den

ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av.

ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt,

sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også

selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder.

VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko

laitetta verkosta.

(standby)

Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb

Deutschlands)

Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien

oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei

einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben

werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune.

(battery)

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard

Model Name : PSR-E333/YPT-330

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is

suspected.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(FCC DoC)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-

tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,

6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha

ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.

Para obter detalhes de produtos, entre em contato com o

representante mais próximo da Yamaha ou com o distribuidor

autorizado relacionado a seguir.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más

cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Подробные сведения об инструменте можно получить у местного

представителя корпорации Yamaha или уполномоченного

дистрибьютора, указанного в следующем списке.

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-3273

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi,

CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL

Tel: 011-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte

Madero Este-C1107CEK

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 011-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Switzerland in Zürich

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/

HUNGARY/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-602039025

POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTO-

NIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce

ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: 022-500-2925

THE NETHERLANDS/

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-228 2160

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Office

Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia)

Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow,

121059, Russia

Tel: 495 626 5005

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali,

Dubai, United Arab Emirates

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd.

5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex

Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India

Tel: 0124-466-5551

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 021-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong,

Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 03-78030900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 6747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2622

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Works LTD

P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680,

New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

EKB54

U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division

012POTY*.*-01A0

Printed in China

WW13050

Yamaha Global Home

http://www.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/

Transcripción de documentos

DIGITAL KEYBOARD Owner’s Manual Thank you for purchasing this Yamaha Digital Keyboard! We recommend that you read this manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the instrument. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future reference. Before using the instrument, be sure to read “PRECAUTIONS” on pages 4–5. EN (US only) LIMITED 1-YEAR WARRANTY ON PORTABLE KEYBOARDS (NP, NPV, PSRE, YPG AND YPT SERIES) Thank you for selecting a Yamaha product. Yamaha products are designed and manufactured to provide a high level of defect-free performance. Yamaha Corporation of America (“Yamaha”) is proud of the experience and craftsmanship that goes into each and every Yamaha product. Yamaha sells its products through a network of reputable, specially authorized dealers and is pleased to offer you, the Original Owner, the following Limited Warranty, which applies only to products that have been (1) directly purchased from Yamaha’s authorized dealers in the fifty states of the USA and District of Columbia (the “Warranted Area”) and (2) used exclusively in the Warranted Area. Yamaha suggests that you read the Limited Warranty thoroughly, and invites you to contact your authorized Yamaha dealer or Yamaha Customer Service if you have any questions. Coverage: Yamaha will, at its option, repair or replace the product covered by this warranty if it becomes defective, malfunctions or otherwise fails to conform with this warranty under normal use and service during the term of this warranty, without charge for labor or materials. Repairs may be performed using new or refurbished parts that meet or exceed Yamaha specifications for new parts. If Yamaha elects to replace the product, the replacement may be a reconditioned unit. You will be responsible for any installation or removal charges and for any initial shipping charges if the product(s) must be shipped for warranty service. However, Yamaha will pay the return shipping charges to any destination within the USA if the repairs are covered by the warranty. This warranty does not cover (a) damage, deterioration or malfunction resulting from accident, negligence, misuse, abuse, improper installation or operation or failure to follow instructions according to the Owner’s Manual for this product; any shipment of the product (claims must be presented to the carrier); repair or attempted repair by anyone other than Yamaha or an authorized Yamaha Service Center; (b) any unit which has been altered or on which the serial number has been defaced, modified or removed; (c) normal wear and any periodic maintenance; (d) deterioration due to perspiration, corrosive atmosphere or other external causes such as extremes in temperature or humidity; (e) damages attributable to power line surge or related electrical abnormalities, lightning damage or acts of God; or (f) RFI/EMI (Interference/ noise) caused by improper grounding or the improper use of either certified or uncertified equipment, if applicable. Any evidence of alteration, erasing or forgery of proof-of-purchase documents will cause this warranty to be void. This warranty covers only the Original Owner and is not transferable. In Order to Obtain Warranty Service: Warranty service will only be provided for defective products within the Warranted Area. Contact your local authorized Yamaha dealer who will advise you of the procedures to be followed. If this is not successful, contact Yamaha at the address, telephone number or website shown below. Yamaha may request that you send the defective product to a local authorized Yamaha Servicer or authorize return of the defective product to Yamaha for repair. If you are uncertain as to whether a dealer has been authorized by Yamaha, please contact Yamaha’s Service Department at the number shown below, or check Yamaha’s website at www.Yamaha.com. Product(s) shipped for service should be packed securely and must be accompanied by a detailed explanation of the problem(s) requiring service, together with the original or a machine reproduction of the bill of sale or other dated, proof-of-purchase document describing the product, as evidence of warranty coverage. Should any product submitted for warranty service be found ineligible therefore, an estimate of repair cost will be furnished and the repair will be accomplished only if requested by you and upon receipt of payment or acceptable arrangement for payment. Limitation of Implied Warranties and Exclusion of Damages: ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF TIME SET FORTH ABOVE. YAMAHA SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR FOR DAMAGES BASED UPON INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OF USE, DAMAGE TO ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT OR OTHER ITEMS AT THE SITE OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF PERFORMANCES OR ANY CONSEQUENCES. YAMAHA’S LIABILITY FOR ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT IS LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE PRODUCT, AT YAMAHA’S OPTION. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state. This is the only express warranty applicable to the product specified herein; Yamaha neither assumes nor authorizes anyone to assume for it any other express warranty. If you have any questions about service received or if you need assistance in locating an authorized Yamaha Servicer, please contact: CUSTOMER SERVICE Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, California 90620-1373 Telephone: 800-854-1569 www.yamaha.com Do not return any product to the above address without a written Return Authorization issued by YAMAHA. ©2009 Yamaha Corporation of America. 2 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Some Yamaha products may have benches and / or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, never mix old batteries with new ones, and never mix different types of batteries. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. Model NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-BP (bottom) Serial No. Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 3 PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, shortcircuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Battery • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Use the specified adaptor (page 68) only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or overheating. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. Do not open • This instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble or modify the internal components in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Water warning • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the instrument, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. • Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries together with old ones. • Do not mix battery types, such as alkaline batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • Do not tamper with or disassemble batteries. • Do not dispose of batteries in fire. • Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged. • Keep batteries away from children. • If the batteries do leak, avoid contact with the leaked fluid. If the battery fluid should come in contact with your eyes, mouth, or skin, wash immediately with water and consult a doctor. Battery fluid is corrosive and may possibly cause loss of sight or chemical burns. • Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/- polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage. • When the batteries run out, or if the instrument is not to be used for a long time, remove the batteries from the instrument to prevent possible leakage of the battery fluid. If you notice any abnormality • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. (If you are using batteries, remove all batteries from the instrument.) Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. • The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. • It emits unusual smells or smoke. • Some object has been dropped into the instrument. • There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/AC power adaptor Connections • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. • Be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. Handling caution Location • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When setting up the product, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand or rack, use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the internal components or result in the instrument falling over. DMI-3 4 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual • Do not insert a finger or hand in any gaps on the instrument. • Never insert or drop paper, metallic, or other objects into the gaps on the panel or keyboard. This could cause physical injury to you or others, damage to the instrument or other property, or operational failure. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the instrument/device or headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. 1/2 Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. Even when the power switch is in standby status, electricity is still flowing to the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure you unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations. NOTICE To avoid the possibility of malfunction/damage to the product, damage to data, or damage to other property, follow the notices below.  Handling and Maintenance • Do not use the instrument in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the instrument, TV, or radio may generate noise. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration, damage to the internal components or unstable operation. (Verified operating temperature range: 5° – 40°C, or 41° – 104°F.) • Do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.  Saving data • Some data items (page 40) are automatically saved as backup data in the internal memory even if you turn the power off. Saved data may be lost due to malfunction or incorrect operation. Save important data to external device such as a computer (page 45). The serial number of this product may be found on the bottom of the unit. You should note this serial number in the space provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase to aid identification in the event of theft. Model No. Serial No. (bottom)  About copyrights • Copying of the commercially available musical data including but not limited to MIDI data and/or audio data is strictly prohibited except for your personal use. • This product incorporates and bundles computer programs and contents in which Yamaha owns copyrights or with respect to which it has license to use others’ copyrights. Such copyrighted materials include, without limitation, all computer software, style files, MIDI files, WAVE data, musical scores and sound recordings. Any unauthorized use of such programs and contents outside of personal use is not permitted under relevant laws. Any violation of copyright has legal consequences. DON’T MAKE, DISTRIBUTE OR USE ILLEGAL COPIES.  About functions/data bundled with the instrument • Some of the preset songs have been edited for length or arrangement, and may not be exactly the same as the original.  About this manual • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. • Apple, Mac and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • The company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. DMI-3 2/2 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 5 About the Manuals This instrument has the following documents and instructional materials.  Included Documents Owner’s Manual (this book)  Online Materials (Downloadable from the web) The following instructional materials are available for downloading from the Yamaha website. Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Access the Yamaha Manual Library, then enter your model name (PSR-E333, for example) in the Model Name area to search the manuals. MIDI Data Format This document contains both the MIDI Data Format and the MIDI Implementation Chart. MIDI Basics (only in English, French, German and Spanish) If you want to know more about MIDI and how to use it, refer to this introductory book. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the above website. Song book (only in English, French, German and Spanish) Formats and functions GM System Level 1 STYLE FILE “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music data can be accurately played by any GMcompatible tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that support GM System Level. The Style File Format combines all of Yamaha’s auto accompaniment know-how into a single unified format. XGlite As its name implies, “XGlite” is a simplified version of Yamaha’s high-quality XG tone generation format. Naturally, you can play back any XG song data using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some songs may play back differently compared to the original data, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. Supplied Accessories • Owner’s manual (this book) • Music rest • AC Power Adaptor * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • My Yamaha Product User Registration * The PRODUCT ID on the sheet will be needed when you fill out the User Registration form. 6 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual USB USB is an abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. It is a serial interface for connecting a computer with peripheral devices. It allows “hot swapping” (connecting peripheral devices while the power to the computer is on). Touch Response The exceptionally natural Touch Response feature, with a convenient front panel on/off switch, gives you maximum expressive level control over the voices. Using the music rest Insert the music rest into the slots as shown. Contents About the Manuals................................................ 6 Formats and functions .......................................... 6 Supplied Accessories ........................................... 6 Using the music rest ............................................. 6 Introduction Setting Up 8 Power Requirements ............................................ 8 Connecting headphones and external audio equipment ........................................................ 9 Connecting a footswitch ....................................... 9 Turn on the power ................................................ 9 Auto Power Off function........................................ 9 Removing the protective film ................................ 9 Panel Controls and Terminals 10 Basic Operation and Displays 12 Basic Operation .................................................. 12 Display................................................................ 13 Reference Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices 14 Select and Play a Voice...................................... 14 Playing the Grand Piano Voice........................... 15 Try playing with enhanced, dynamic sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo)........................................ 15 Touch Response Sensitivity ............................... 15 Adding Harmony................................................. 16 Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual........ 17 Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split.................................................. 17 Play with a Style 18 Select a Style Rhythm ........................................ 18 Play Along with a Style ....................................... 19 Pattern Variation (Sections)................................ 20 Chords ................................................................ 21 Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary . 22 Try Playing a Song with a Style!......................... 23 Play Using the Music Database.......................... 24 Playing Songs Using the Lesson Feature 28 Keys to Success..................................................28 Listening, Timing and Waiting .............................31 Phrase Repeat .................................................... 33 A-B Repeat..........................................................34 Mute .................................................................... 34 Using the Metronome..........................................35 Changing the Tempo...........................................35 Record Your Own Performance 36 Recording............................................................ 36 Recording to a Specific track ..............................37 Deleting User Songs ...........................................39 Backup and Initialization 40 Backup ................................................................40 Initialization .........................................................40 Function Settings 41 Select the item and change the value .................41 Connecting to a Computer 44 Connecting a Personal Computer .......................44 Transferring data between the instrument and a computer .....................................................45 Registering Style Files ........................................46 Appendix Troubleshooting............................................. 47 Song Book Sample ........................................ 48 Voice List ........................................................ 58 Drum Kit List .................................................. 62 Style List ......................................................... 64 Music Database List ...................................... 65 Song List......................................................... 66 Effect Type List .............................................. 67 Specifications................................................. 68 Index................................................................ 69 25 Select and Listen to a Specific Song .................. 25 Listening to the Demo Songs ............................. 26 BGM Playback.................................................... 26 Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause .. 27 Changing the Melody Voice................................ 27 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 7 Setting Up Introduction Be sure to do the following operations BEFORE turning on the power. Power Requirements Although the instrument will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries, Yamaha recommends use of an AC adaptor whenever possible. An AC adaptor is more environmentally friendly than batteries and does not deplete resources. Using an AC Power Adaptor 1 Make sure that the [ ] (Standby/On) switch of the instrument is off (the backlit display is off). WARNING • Use the specified adaptor (page 68). The use of other adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both the adaptor and the instrument. 2 Connect the AC power adaptor to the power supply jack. 3 Plug the AC adaptor into an AC outlet. CAUTION • Unplug the AC Power Adaptor when not using the instrument, or during electrical storms. 2 AC power adaptor 3 AC outlet Using Batteries 1 Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel. 2 Insert the six new alkaline batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on the side of the compartment. 3 Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place. NOTICE • Never connect or disconnect the AC power adaptor when the batteries are installed in the instrument and the power is on. Doing so will turn the power off, possibly resulting in loss of the data being transferred as well as the data currently in the transfer destination during transferring or recording of data. For battery operation the instrument requires six 1.5V “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries. (Alkaline batteries are recommended.) When battery power becomes too low for proper operation, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other problems may occur. When this happens, make sure to replace all batteries, following the precautions listed below. If necessary, also make sure to save all important User data (see page 45), since custom panel settings are lost when the batteries are removed. WARNING • Make sure to install the batteries with the proper orientation, maintaining the correct polarity (as shown). Incorrect battery installation may result in heat, fire and/or leaking of corrosive chemicals. • When the batteries run down, replace them with a complete set of six new batteries. NEVER mix old and new batteries. Do not use different kinds of batteries (e.g. alkaline and manganese) at the same time. • If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the batteries from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery. NOTICE • Use alkaline batteries for this instrument. Other types of batteries (including rechargeable batteries) may have sudden drops of power when battery power becomes low, possibly resulting in loss of data in the flash memory. • Please use the power adaptor when transferring data to flash memory. Batteries (including rechargeable types) can be drained rapidly by this type of operation. If the batteries do become drained during a data transfer, both the data being transferred and the data currently in the transfer destination will be lost. 8 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Setting Up Make all necessary connections BEFORE turning the power on. Connecting headphones and external audio equipment Turn on the power Turn down the volume by turning the [MASTER VOLUME] control to the left and press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by using the [MASTER VOLUME] control. Pressing the [ ] (Standby/On) switch again turns the power off. You can connect the PHONES/OUTPUT jack to a set of headphones, keyboard amplifier, stereo system, mixer, tape recorder, or other line-level audio device to send the instrument’s output signal to that device. The internal speakers are automatically shut off when a plug is inserted into this jack. The PHONES/OUTPUT jack also functions as an external output. NOTE • You can set the Master equalizer (EQ) which is provided to give you the best possible sound when listening through different reproduction systems. The Master equalizer (EQ) can be set in the Function settings (page 42 Function 023). CAUTION • Avoid listening with the headphones at high volume for long periods of time; doing so may not only result in ear fatigue, it may be damaging to your hearing. CAUTION • To prevent damage to the speakers, set the volume of the external devices at the minimum setting and turn power off the devices before connecting them. Failure to observe these precautions may result in electric shock or equipment damage. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all devices at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. CAUTION • When using a power adaptor, even when the power is off, a small amount of electricity is still being consumed by the instrument. When you are not using the instrument for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC power adaptor from the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the instrument. Auto Power Off function To prevent unnecessary power consumption, this instrument features an Auto Power Off function that automatically turns the power off if the instrument is not operated for a specified period of time. The amount of time that will elapse before the power is automatically turned off can be set in the Function (page 43 Function 040). Setting range: 5/10/15/30/60/120/OFF (minutes) Default setting: 30 (minutes) To disable the Auto Power Off function While holding down the lowest key, press the [ ] (Standby/On) switch to turn on the power. Alternately select “Off” in the Function settings. Connecting a footswitch The sustain function lets you produce a natural sustain as you play by pressing an optional footswitch. Plug the Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch into the SUSTAIN jack and use it to switch sustain on and off. NOTE • The data and settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. For information on the backup parameters, see page 40. NOTE • Make sure that the footswitch plug is properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. • Do not press the footswitch while turning the power on. Doing this changes the recognized polarity of the footswitch, resulting in reversed footswitch operation. Removing the protective film Remove the transparent protective film that was applied to the display prior to shipment from the factory. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 9 Panel Controls and Terminals Front Panel q w e r t [ ] (Standby/On) switch..................................... page 9 [MASTER VOLUME] control ................................ page 9 [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button .... page 31 [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button............................. page 28 [PHRASE REPEAT] button ................................ page 33 Front Panel Music Database List (page 65) In the Lesson mode y PART [L] button ............................................................ page 32 [R] button ............................................................ page 32 q e In the Recording mode y [REC TRACK 2] button....................................... page 37 [REC TRACK 1] button....................................... page 37 w r t u i o !0 !1 !2 !3 !4 [METRONOME] button....................................... page 35 [TEMPO/TAP] button.......................................... page 35 [SONG] button ............................................ pages 12, 25 [VOICE] button ........................................... pages 12, 14 [STYLE] button ........................................... pages 12, 18 Number buttons [0]–[9], [+/YES], [-/NO]........... page 12 [FUNCTION] button ............................................ page 41 [DEMO/BGM] button .......................................... page 26 !5 In the Song mode !5 !6 !7 !8 [A-B REPEAT] button ......................................... page 34 [REW] button ...................................................... page 27 [FF] button .......................................................... page 27 [PAUSE] button................................................... page 27 !5 !6 !7 !8 [ACMP ON/OFF] button ..................................... page 19 [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button............................... page 20 [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button.................................. page 20 [SYNC START] button ........................................ page 19 !9 @0 @1 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 @8 [START/STOP] button ................................ pages 12, 25 [REC] button ....................................................... page 36 [PORTABLE GRAND] button ............................. page 15 [MUSIC DATABASE] button ............................... page 24 [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button ........................ page 15 [SPLIT] button .................................................... page 17 [DUAL] button..................................................... page 17 [HARMONY] button ............................................ page 16 [TOUCH] button.................................................. page 15 Drum Kit icons ................................................... page 14 In the Style mode Rear Panel @9 #0 #1 #2 10 SUSTAIN jack ....................................................... page 9 USB terminal ...................................................... page 44 PHONES/OUTPUT jack ........................................ page 9 DC IN jack ............................................................. page 8 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual @8 !6 !7 !8 Panel Controls and Terminals Voice List (page 58) Display (page 13) u i 001 GrandPno Style List (page 64) o !2 !3 !4 !0 001 y !9 Song List (page 66) !1 @1 @0 @2 @3 @4 @5 @6 @7 Rear Panel @9 #0 #1 #2 The “Press & Hold” Symbol Buttons having this indication can be used to call up an alternate function when the relevant button is pressed and held. Hold down this button until the function is called up. C3 (Middle C) PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 11 Basic Operation and Displays Basic Operation Press a button to select a basic function: Voice, Style or Song. To change the instrument voice that sounds when you play the keyboard, press the [VOICE] button. If you want to play along with auto accompaniment, press the [STYLE] button. If you want to listen to a song, press the [SONG] button. 3 Display (page 13) 001 1 2 GrandPno 001 1 Select a basic function. [SONG] button .............. To select a Song. [VOICE] button .............. To select a Voice. [STYLE] button.............. To select a Style. When you select a basic function, the name and number of the currently selected Song, Style or Voice is shown. 2 Select an item or value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Song, Voice and Style Lists on pages 58–66. Number buttons [0]–[9] The number buttons can be used to directly enter a Song, Style or Voice number or parameter value. For numbers that start with one or two zeroes, the first zeroes can be omitted. Example: Selecting Voice 002, Bright Piano. Press number buttons [0], [0], [2]. 3 [+], [-] buttons Press the [+] button briefly to increase the value by 1, or press the [-] button briefly to decrease the value by 1. Press and hold either button to continuously increase or decrease the value in the corresponding direction. Press briefly to decrease. Start a function or play the keyboard. Voice ............................. Play the keyboard. Song ............................. Press the [START/STOP] button to play Songs. Style.............................. Press the [START/STOP] button to play the Style rhythm. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. 12 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Press briefly to increase. Basic Operation and Displays Display The Main display shows all of the current basic settings for Song, Style and Voice. It also includes a range of indicators that show the on/off status for various functions. SONG/VOICE/STYLE TOUCH RESPONSE Appears when Touch Response is on (page 15). KEYS TO SUCCESS Indicate the operating condition of the instrument (page 12). Appears when the Keys to Success function is on (page 28). ULTRA-WIDE STEREO Appears when ULTRA-WIDE STEREO is on (page 15). PHRASE REPEAT Appears when the Phrase Repeat function is on (page 33). Notation Displays the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use, or the notes of chords you specify when the Dictionary function is in use. At other times the notes you play on the keyboard are displayed. SPLIT Passing Status Song: ✩✩✩ Appears when the Split function is on (page 17). ✩✩✩ ✩✩✩ ✩✩✩ NOTE The number of stars depends on the number of passed steps. • Any notes occurring below or above the staff are indicated by “8va” in the notation. ACMP ON Appears when the auto accompaniment is on (page 19). DUAL Appears when the Dual function is on (page 17). Step: ✩ • For a few specific chords, not all notes may be shown in the notation section of the display. This is due to space limitations in the display. HARMONY Appears when the Harmony function is on (page 16). 001 GrandPno 003 Chord Display Indicates the name of the chord currently being played back, or the name of the chord being played on the keyboard. Measure Indicates the current measure during playback of a Song. 003 Function Indicates the Function number when the Function is in use. 027 Keyboard Display Indicates notes currently being played. Indicates the melody and chord notes of a Song when the Song lesson function is in use. Also indicates the notes of a chord—either when playing a chord or when using the Dictionary function. Song/recording track display Information related to the Song/ recording tracks is shown here. (See pages 34 and 36.) Lit: Track contains data Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data Flashing: Track is selected as recording track Beat Display Indicates the beat of the current Style or Song with flashing arrows. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 13 Reference Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices This instrument features a variety of realistic, built-in voices. The grand piano Voice is automatically selected whenever the power is turned on, but you can easily change this to guitar, drums, or any of an extensive range of voices. Voice 001 GrandPno 001 Percussion and drum icons Grand Piano Voice Ultra-Wide Stereo Touch Response Select and Play a Voice Press the [VOICE] button and then select the desired Voice, referring to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12 for instructions. Refer to the Voice List on page 58. Voice number 001 GrandPno 001 Voice name The Voice shown here becomes the Main Voice for the instrument. Preset Voice Types 14 001–140 Instrument Voices 141–153 (Drum Kit) Various drum and percussion sounds are assigned to individual keys, from which they can be played. Details on the instruments and key assignments of each Drum Kit can be found in the Drum Kit List on page 62. 154–497 XGlite Voices 000 One Touch Setting (OTS) The One Touch Setting feature automatically selects the most suitable Voice for you when you select a Style or Song. Simply select Voice number “000” to activate this feature. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Playing the Grand Piano Voice When you simply want to play a piano Voice, all you have to do is press one convenient button. Press the [PORTABLE GRAND] button. The Voice “Grand Piano” will automatically be selected as the Main Voice. Try playing with enhanced, dynamic sound (Ultra-Wide Stereo) You can play the keyboard with a spacious, dynamic sound effect that gives you the sensation of hearing the sound outside of the speakers. Turn on the Ultra-Wide Stereo effect, and hear the sound expand around you—as if the speaker position is outside of the instrument. NOTE Press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button. • The wide effect type can be set in the Function settings (page 42 Function 024). GrandPno 001 SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Functions Settings by pressing and holding the [ULTRAWIDE STEREO] button for longer than a second. Appears when Ultra-Wide Stereo is on. To turn ULTRA-WIDE STEREO off, press the [ULTRA-WIDE STEREO] button again. Touch Response Sensitivity Press the [TOUCH] button to turn Touch Response on. When Touch Response is on, you can control the volume of notes according to how hard you play the keys. Touch Response is normally on. GrandPno NOTE • The Touch Response function cannot be used for some Voices (such as organ), even if the Touch Response icon appears in the display. • When Touch Response is on you can adjust the keyboard’s sensitivity to dynamics in three steps in the Function settings (page 41 Function 006). 001 Appears when Touch Response is on. Press the [TOUCH] button again to turn Touch Response off. When Touch Response is off, the same volume will be produced no matter how hard you play the keys. SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Function settings by pressing and holding the [TOUCH] button for longer than a second. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 15 Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Adding Harmony This feature adds harmony notes as well as tremolo or echo effects to the Main Voice. 1 Press the [HARMONY] button to turn Harmony on. When you don’t want to add harmony notes, press the [HARMONY] button again to turn Harmony off. GrandPno 001 2 Currently selected Harmony type 3 Trio Select a desired Harmony type by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 67. Try playing the keyboard with the Harmony function. The effect and operation of each Harmony Type is different—refer to the section “How to sound each Harmony type” below as well as the Harmony Type list for details. How to sound each Harmony type • Harmony type 01–05 Press the right-hand keys while playing chords in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard when auto accompaniment is on (page 19). • Harmony type 13–19 (Tremolo) Keep holding down the keys. • Harmony type 06–12 (Trill) • Harmony type 20–26 (Echo) Hold down two keys. Play the keys. You can adjust the Harmony Volume in the Function Settings (page 42 Function 026). 16 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual • When you press the [HARMONY] button to turn this feature on, the appropriate Harmony type for the currently selected Main Voice is automatically selected. Appears when Harmony is on. Press and hold the [HARMONY] button for longer than a second. “HarmType” appears in the display for a few seconds, followed by the Harmony Type. 02 NOTE NOTE • You can also access the Harmony Type setting display by pressing the [FUNCTION] button several times (page 42 Function 025). • Harmony will be turned off if the Chord Dictionary function is used. NOTE • The Harmony notes can be added only to the Main Voice, not to Dual or Split Voices. • The keys left of the Split Point of the keyboard produce no Harmony notes when auto accompaniment is on (ACMP ON is lit). Try Playing a Variety of Instrument Voices Playing Two Voices Simultaneously—Dual You can select a second Voice which will play in addition to the Main Voice selected on page 12. This second Voice is known as the Dual Voice. Two Voices sound at the same time Press the [DUAL] button to turn the Dual function on. When Dual is on, you can play a Dual Voice in a layer with the Main Voice. To turn the Dual Voice off and play only the Main Voice, press the [DUAL] button again. NOTE • The Dual Voice setting can be changed in the Function settings (page 42 Function 011). SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Function settings by pressing and holding the [DUAL] button for longer than a second. Flute 001 Appears when dual is on • When you select a Voice of the “DUAL” category (123–132), Dual is turned on automatically. Playing Different Voices with the Left and Right Hands—Split In the Split mode you can play different Voices to the left and right of the keyboard “Split Point.” The main and Dual Voices can be played to the right of the Split Point, while the Voice played to the left of the Split Point is known as the “Split Voice” Split Point ...... default setting: 54 (F#2) 36 60 48 Split Voice 72 84 Main Voice and Dual Voice Press the [SPLIT] button to turn the Split function on. When Split is on you can play a Split Voice to the left of the Split Point. When you don’t want to play a Split Voice, press the [SPLIT] button to turn Split off. • The Split Voice setting can be changed in the Function settings (page 42 Function 015). SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Function settings by pressing and holding the [SPLIT] button for longer than a second. Choir 001 NOTE Appears when Split is on. • The Split Point setting can be changed in the Function Settings (page 41 Function 005). Adding other effects to the sound You can also play the sounds of the instrument adding Reverb, Chorus and Sustain. The best-suited Reverb and Chorus type is automatically selected whenever you select a Song or Style, but you can select any of the available Reverb or Chorus Types. These effects can be set in the Function settings (page 42). Refer to the Reverb and Chorus Type lists on page 67 for details. Reverb ........................This effect adds the ambience of a room or concert hall to the sound. Chorus........................This effect makes the Voice sound richer, warmer and more spacious. Panel Sustain .............This function adds a fixed sustain to the keyboard Voices. The sustain function can also be applied with the optional footswitch (page 9). PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 17 Play with a Style This instrument has an auto accompaniment feature that produces accompaniment (rhythm + bass + chords) in the style you choose to match chords you play with your left hand. You can select from 106 different styles covering a range of musical genres and time signatures. 1 Press the [STYLE] button to access the Style Functions (printed below). 001 GrandPno 001 2 35 Select a Style Rhythm Most Styles include a rhythm part. Let’s begin by listening to just the basic rhythm. The rhythm part is played using percussion instruments only. Press the [STYLE] button and then select the desired Style, referring to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12 for instructions. Refer to the Style List on page 64. Style number Style name NOTE • To adjust the tempo of the Style, see page 35. 001 8BtModrn 001 Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the Style rhythm. Press the [START/STOP] button a second time when you want to stop playback. 18 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Since the Pianist category Styles (098–106) have no rhythm parts, no sound will be produced if you start rhythm-only playback. To use these Styles, turn on the auto accompaniment and play the keyboard as described on page 19 (The bass and chord accompaniment parts will sound.) Play with a Style Play Along with a Style Here we’ll see how to add bass and chord accompaniment to the basic rhythm to produce a full, rich accompaniment that you can play along with. 1 Press the [STYLE] button and select the desired Style. For instructions on how to select a Style, see page 12. 2 Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn automatic accompaniment on. Pressing this button a second time will turn automatic accompaniment off. NOTE LoveSong 001 Appears when auto accompaniment is on • You can also select commercially available Style Files. To do this load the Style Files from the computer to the instrument, and then register the style data starting with Style number 107 (page 46). If the Style File has not been registered, “No data” will be displayed when selecting Style number 107. NOTE When auto accompaniment is on ... The keys to the left of the Split Point (54; F#2) will play only chords. This is known as the “Auto Accompaniment range.” • The Split Point setting can be changed in the Function settings (page 41 Function 005). Split Point........ default setting: 54 (F#2) 36 60 48 72 Auto Accompaniment range 3 Press the [SYNC START] button to turn the Sync Start function on. 018 LoveSong 001 Flashes when Sync Start is on. 4 Start playing. Style playback will begin as soon as you play a chord in the Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard. Try playing other chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand. NOTE 5 Stop playing. Playback will stop as soon as you press the [START/STOP] button. NOTE You can also stop playing by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button so that an appropriate ending pattern will play and then Style playback will stop (page 20). • You can also press the [START/STOP] button to begin the rhythm of the selected Style. The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a key in the Auto Accompaniment range of the keyboard. • The Style Volume can be adjusted in the Function settings (page 41 Function 001). SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Function settings by pressing and holding the [STYLE] button for longer than a second. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 19 Play with a Style Pattern Variation (Sections) The instrument features a wide variety of Style “Sections” (patterns) that allow you to vary the arrangement of the accompaniment to match the Song you are playing. Adding an Intro Switching Main Sections Pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button before playing back the Style automatically adds a short introduction before starting the actual (Main) rhythm. When the intro finishes playing, Style playback shifts to the Main Section. There are two variations on the basic Section (A and B). This switches between the Main A and Main B Sections, automatically playing a fill-in pattern to smoothly lead into the next Section. You can also select either the Main A or B Section to start by pressing the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button before starting the Style. Adding an Ending Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button to begin playing an ending Section. Playback will stop when the ending has played all the way through. Adding a Fill-in A Fill-in pattern is automatically added before changing to Section A or B. If you press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button a second time (while the ending is playing) the ending will play ritardando (the tempo will gradually get slower). Recommended method for using Sections  Setup 1. Press the [STYLE] button and then select a Style. 2. Press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button to turn auto accompaniment on. 3. Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. 4. Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button to select Main A or Main B. 5. Press the [SYNC START] button to turn Sync Start on. You’re now ready to play the intro.  Start playing 6. As soon as you play a chord with your left hand, the Intro of the selected Style starts. 7. Press the [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. (Switching Main Sections/Adding a Fill-in)  Ending 8. Press the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button. (Adding an Ending) An appropriate ending Section will play and then Style playback will stop. You can have the ending gradually slow down (ritardando) by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button again while the ending is playing back. 20 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Play with a Style Chords For users who are new to chords, this chart conveniently shows common chords for your reference. Since there are many useful chords and many different ways to use them musically, refer to commercially available chord books for further details. You can also look up chords using the Chord Dictionary function in this instrument (page 22).  Indicates the root note. Major • • • • Minor Seventh Minor Seventh Major Seventh C Cm C7 Cm7 CM 7 D Dm D7 Dm7 DM 7 E Em E7 Em7 EM7 C F Fm F7 Fm7 FM7 G Gm G7 Gm7 GM7 A Am A7 Am7 AM 7 B Bm B7 Bm 7 BM 7 Inversions can be used as well as in “root” position—with the following exceptions: m7, m7b5, 6, m6, sus4, aug, dim7, 7b5, 6(9), sus2 Inversion of the 7sus4 and m7(11) chords are not recognized if the notes are omitted. Sus2 chords are indicated by the root name only. If you play a chord which does not exist, the name of chord is not shown in the display, and the Style plays back only rhythm and bass. Easy Chords This method lets you easily play chords in the accompaniment range of the keyboard using only one, two, or three fingers. For root “C” C To play a major chord Press the root note () of the chord. Cm To play a minor chord Press the root note together with the nearest black key to the left of it. C7 To play a seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white key to the left of it. Cm 7 To play a minor seventh chord Press the root note together with the nearest white and black keys to the left of it (three keys altogether). PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 21 Play with a Style Looking up Chords Using the Chord Dictionary The Dictionary function is essentially a built-in “chord dictionary” that shows you the individual notes of chords. This is convenient when you know the name of a certain chord and want to quickly learn how to play it. 1 Press and hold the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button for longer than a second. “Dict.” will appear in the display. Hold for longer than a second. 2 As an example, we’ll learn how to play a GM7 (G major seventh) chord. Press the “G” key in the section of the keyboard labeled “ROOT .” (The note doesn’t sound.) The root note you set is shown in the display. Keys for chord type dictionary Keys for root dictionary The highest key Dict. 001 3 Press the “M7” (major seventh) key in the section of the keyboard labeled “CHORD TYPE .” (The note doesn’t sound.) The notes you should play for the specified chord (root note and chord type) are shown in the display, both as notation and in the keyboard diagram. Chord name (root and type) Dict. 001 Notation of chord Individual notes of chord (keyboard) To call up possible inversions of the chord, press the [+]/[-] buttons. 4 22 Try playing a chord in the auto accompaniment range (refer on page 19) of the keyboard, checking the indications in the display. When you’ve played the chord properly, a bell sound signals your success and the chord name in the display flashes. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • Major chords are usually indicated by the root name only. For example, the indication “C” in a score refers to a “C Major” chord. To look up the fingering for a major chord press the root key and then the M chord type key. • These chords are not shown in the Chord Dictionary function: 6(9), M7(9), M7(#11), b5, M7b5, M7aug, m7(11), mM7(9), mM7b5, 7b5, sus2 Play with a Style Try Playing a Song with a Style! Let’s try out the Song “Aura Lee.” For information on how to play Styles using chords, see pages 19 and 20. Try playing chords with your left hand and play a melody with your right hand. Practice Aura Lee Recommended Style: 018 Love Song Recommended Voice: 047 String Ensemble Composer: G. Poulton Standard Chords G A D C E D7 A D C E D7 Easy Chords G PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 23 Play with a Style Play Using the Music Database You want to play music in your favorite style, but you’re not sure how to select the best Voice and Style for the type of music you want to play, simply select the appropriate style from the Music Database. The panel settings will automatically be adjusted for the ideal combination of sounds and style! 1 Press the [MUSIC DATABASE] button. A Music Database name will appear in the display. 001 2 AlvFever Select a Music Database. Referring to the Music Database category list printed on the panel, select a Music Database that matches the image of the song you intend to play. For example, select one from the “SWING&JAZZ” category (047–056) if you want to play jazz. 051 NOTE • Refer to the Music Database List on page 65. MoonLit 001 3 Play the chords with your left hand and melody with your right. A jazz Style will start playing when you play a left-hand chord to the left of the Split Point (page 19). Refer to page 21 for information about playing chords. Split Point........default setting: 54 (F#2) 36 48 60 72 Press the [START/STOP] button to stop playback. You can also stop playback by pressing the [INTRO/ENDING/rit.] button (page 20). 24 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • The Split Point setting can be changed in the Function settings (page 41 Function 005). Playing Songs This instrument has 102 built-in Songs. For this instrument, the term “Song” refers to the data that makes up a piece of music. Try selecting and listening to the various Songs. Start/Stop Song 001 DEMO/BGM GrandPno 001 Press the [SONG] button to access the SONG functions (printed above the buttons). Select and Listen to a Specific Song Press the [SONG] button and then select the desired Song, referring to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12 for instructions. Refer to the Song List on page 66. Song number 001 Song name Demo 1 005 Press the [START/STOP] button to play back the Song. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. NOTE • Song number “004” is automatically selected whenever the power is turned ON. When you want to select one of the Song numbers 001–003, use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. • To adjust the tempo of song playback, see page 35. • You can adjust the balance between Song playback and the notes you play on the keyboard by setting the volume of the playback sound (page 41 Function 002). SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Function settings by pressing and holding the [SONG] button for longer than a second. These demonstration songs showcase the various sounds of the instrument. Each of these songs has two variations: an easy one which even beginners can practice with ease, and another more challenging version. We’ve collected various folk songs from around the world which have been handed down from through the generations, as well as famous classical pieces. Try playing the melody of these songs with your right hand. Enjoy performing a piece with Style accompaniment (automatic accompaniment data). (Keys to Success is designed so that you master playing the melody with your right hand first, and then learn the roots of the chords with your left hand.) These songs feature solo instruments other than piano—letting you enjoy playing other instrumental voices along with orchestral accompaniment. These included famous pieces from around the world along with well-known piano pieces. Enjoy the beautiful, resonant piano sound as you play solo or along with orchestral backing. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 25 Playing Songs Listening to the Demo Songs Press the [DEMO] button. Songs 001, 002, 003 play in sequence, and playback will continue repeatedly starting again from the first Song 001. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] or [START/STOP] button. BGM Playback With the default setting only a few of the internal songs are played back and repeated when the [DEMO/BGM] button is pressed. This setting can be changed so that all internal songs are played, or all songs transferred to the instrument from a computer are played. Four playback group settings are provided. Simply select the one that suits your needs. 1 Press and hold the [DEMO/BGM] button for longer than a second. “DemoGrp” will appear in the display for a few seconds, then the currently selected repeat playback target will be displayed. NOTE • You can also set the demo group in the Function settings (page 43 Function 037). Hold for longer than a second. 2 3 Use the [+] or [-] button to select a repeat playback group from the table below. Demo Preset songs (001–003) Preset All preset songs (001–102) User All User songs (103–107) Download All songs transferred from a computer (108–) Press the [DEMO/BGM] button. The songs in the group selected play in sequence. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [DEMO] or [START/STOP] button. NOTE • When User songs and Download songs data do not exist, Demo songs are played back. NOTE • You can select a song by using the [+] button after pressing the [DEMO/BGM] button. The [-] button can be used to go back to the beginning of the selected song. Random Song Playback The Random Play mode causes the songs in the group selected for BGM playback to be played back in random order. (Demo group Songs [Preset Songs 001–003] cannot be played at random.) The setting of the Random Play mode can be set in the Function settings (page 43 Function 038). 26 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Playing Songs Song Fast Forward, Fast Reverse, and Pause These are just like the transport controls on a cassette deck or CD player, letting you fast forward (FF), rewind (REW) and pause (PAUSE) playback of the song. [REW] button ........ Fast-reverses the Song if pressed during playback (no sound is heard during fast reverse). Decreases the measure number if pressed while playback is stopped. [FF] button............. Fast-forwards the Song if pressed during playback. Increases the measure number if pressed while playback is stopped. [PAUSE] button ..... Temporarily stops playback. Press this button a second time to resume playback from the point at which it was stopped. NOTE • When an A-B repeat (page 34) range is specified the fast reverse and forward function will only work within that range. NOTE • [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] button cannot be used during Song playback by using the [DEMO/BGM] button. Changing the Melody Voice NOTE You can change a Song’s melody Voice to any other Voice you prefer. • You cannot change the melody Voice of a User Song. 1 Select the Song and play it. Refer to the section “Basic Operation” on page 12. 2 Select a desired Voice by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. The selected Voice sounds when you play the keyboard. 004 3 • When you select a Voice of the DUAL category (123– 132), only the Voice whose MIDI program change number is indicated in the Voice List (page 59) is played. HnkyTonk NOTE • If a Song has played through and stopped during this procedure, press the [START/STOP] button to start playback again. Press and hold the [VOICE] button for longer than a second. “SONG MELODY VOICE” appears in the display for a few seconds, indicating that the Voice selected in Step 2 has replaced the Song’s original melody Voice. Hold for longer than a second. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 27 Using the Lesson Feature You can practice the preset Songs using these lesson functions: “Keys to Success,” “Listening, Timing, Waiting” and “Phrase Repeat.” Keys to Success helps you master a Song, whereas Listening, Timing, Waiting helps you first master the timing then playing the correct notes. Phrase Repeat lets you select and repeatedly practice a specific phrase in the Song. If you’re using a keyboard instrument for the first time, we suggest you start with Keys to Success. You can refer to the music score in the Song Book (free downloadable scores). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website: https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ Keys to Success In the “Keys to Success” mode, you can practice individual phrases in the Song (as “Steps”), letting you effectively master the Song by mastering each phrase separately. Each time you finish a specific Step, your score is shown in the display. Passing one Step (with a score of 60 or better) lets you go on to next one automatically. All preset Songs other than 001–003 can be used with this mode, especially the “LEARN TO PLAY” category Songs (004–019). 2 4 3 1 001 GrandPno 001 1 Select a song for your lesson. For this example we’ll select song “Für Elise (Basic)” from the “LEARN TO PLAY” category. For instructions on how to select a Song, see page 12. 004 2 Elise 1 Turn Keys to Success on. Pressing the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button turns the Keys to Success feature on, and a Step of the Song is automatically selected for your practice. The currently selected Step number and the lesson parts are shown in the display. Current Step number Step01 Lesson part : Right-hand lesson : Left-hand lesson : Both-hands lesson PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual • The score for “Für Elise (Basic)” is provided on page 48. • Song numbers 001 to 003 cannot be used for the Lesson feature. If you select one of these Songs, “NoLesson” is shown in the display. Appears when Keys to Success is on 28 NOTE NOTE • The total number of Steps varies depending on the Song. • Each lesson part varies depending on the Steps. Using the Lesson Feature 3 Start the Lesson. Press the [START/STOP] button to start Lesson. After the lead-in, Step 01 of the song starts automatically, and the appropriate notes appear in the display. Step01 • In some Steps, the lead-in may run a little slower than normal because a ritardando or fermata section is placed before the Step. NOTE 001 You can start playing along on the keyboard as soon as the lead-in finishes. The score marker and keyboard marker in the display will indicate the notes to play. Each time you have practiced all the way through a Step, your performance will be evaluated and your score (from 0–100) is shown in the display. 068 NOTE Excellen • You can practice the specified phrase using the Lesson modes “1 Listening,” “2 Timing” or “3 Waiting” described on page 31. In these Lesson modes with the Keys to Success function, however, it is not possible to pass the Step. When you want to turn off these Lesson modes, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button a number of times to select off (“Step number” will appear in the display). NOTE • If the specified part is both hands, you cannot pass the Step until you play both hands, even if you play one of the hands well. Only a message such as “L-part is Nice” appears in the display. Displayed when you’ve passed the Step. Score of 0–59 Try the same Step again. The same Step begins automatically. Score of 60–100 You passed! The next Step begins automatically. You can select another Step as desired by using the [+]/[-] buttons. All songs have a finishing Step, and in that Step, you will practice all the way thorough the song which you have selected as a lesson Song in Step 1. When you pass all Steps, the Keys to Success mode will automatically be turned off and playback stops. NOTE 004 Elise 1 001 4 Stop Lesson. You can stop the Lesson at any time by pressing the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button. • When you want to select another Song during a lesson, press the [SONG] button to call up the currently selected Song name in the display (for three seconds), then select the Song as required using the [+]/[-] buttons or number buttons while the Song name appears. When you select the new Song, the lowest number Step not yet passed of the Song will automatically be selected for the Lesson. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 29 Using the Lesson Feature Entering and Clearing the Passing Status  Entering Passing status will automatically be entered and shown in the display when the Step or Song is selected. You can recognize at a glance whether or not you’ve passed the selected Step or Song. When Step is selected Step01 001 ✩: Passed No information: Not yet passed When Song is selected 004 Elise 1 001 ✩✩✩ : There are one or more Steps not yet passed in addition to the last Step ✩✩✩ : Only last Step passed ✩✩✩ : All Steps passed other than last Step ✩✩✩ : All Steps passed  Clearing You can clear existing passing status entries. Select the desired Song or Step for clearing the passing status and hold the [KEYS TO SUCCESS] button for longer than three seconds. After the passing status has been cleared, a “Cleared” message will appear on the display. Once the operation has been completed, no information will appear even when selecting the Song or Step. Cleared Hold for longer than three seconds 30 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You cannot clear any entries during Song or Step playback. If a Song or Step is currently being played back, stop playback first. • Deleting the recorded Song will delete all Step passing status entries as well. Using the Lesson Feature Listening, Timing and Waiting You can select any Song you like and use it for a left-hand, right-hand, or both-hands lesson. Song Lesson lets you learn how to play Songs in three easy steps. The Lesson modes:  1 Listening There’s no need to play the keyboard in this mode. The model melody/chords (in other words, the musical material you should learn) of the part you selected will sound. Listen to it carefully and learn it well. NOTE • Songs that can be used with the Lesson feature include Songs transferred from a computer to flash memory (SMF Format 0 only; see page 45). The procedure for transferring songs are described on page 45. • User Songs cannot be used for the lesson. LISTEN 004 The notation and key positions of the model melody are shown in the display.  2 Timing In this mode, try playing the notes with the correct timing. Simply concentrate on playing each note in time with the rhythmic accompaniment. The correct notes sound even if you play wrong notes as long as you play in time with the rhythm. Play the notes shown in the display. TIMING 004  3 Waiting In this mode, try playing the correct notes. The notes you should play appear in the score and the keyboard on the display. The Song pauses until you play the right note. Song playback tempo will vary to match the speed you are playing at. The song will slow down when you play wrong notes, so you can learn at your own pace and tempo. NOTE • When you don’t want to change the Song playback tempo, or you want to learn using the original tempo, you can change the setting in the Function settings (page 43 Function 036). WAITING 004 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 31 Using the Lesson Feature Lesson Operation 1 Select the desired Song for your lesson. For instructions on how to select a Song, see page 12. 2 Select the part you want to practice. Press the [R] button for a right-hand lesson, [L] button for a left-hand lesson, or press both the [R] and [L] buttons simultaneously for a both-hands lesson. The selected part is displayed. Left-hand lesson NOTE Right-hand lesson • The following songs are intended for use as righthand lessons, and cannot be used for left-hand or both-hands lessons. If you select a right-hand lesson Song, a “No LPart” message is shown in the display. Right Song numbers: 020–050, 071–076, 079 Left • For songs transferred from a computer, the “No LPart” indication does not appear, even when there is no left hand part in the song. Both-hands lesson BothHand 3 Select the Lesson mode. Each time the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button is pressed the lesson modes are selected in sequence: 1 Listening  2 Timing  3 Waiting  Off  1 Listening ...etc. The currently selected Lesson mode is shown in the display. NOTE • When the melody Voice of the Song is changed, the key position shown in the display may be shifted (in octave units), depending on the Voice selected. NOTE • You can select Lesson modes by repeatedly pressing the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button. 4 5 Start Lesson. Song playback will begin automatically when you select the Lesson mode, and the appropriate notes appear in the display. Stop the Lesson mode. You can stop the Lesson mode at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Grade When the Lesson Song has played all the way through in Lesson mode “2 Timing” or “3 Waiting,” your performance will be evaluated in four levels: OK, Good, Very Good, or Excellent. 32 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • You cannot use Dual or Split Voices during lessons. • The Split Point is fixed and it cannot be changed. For the left-hand lesson, it is fixed at 59 or B2; for the left-hand chord lesson, it is fixed at 54 or F# 2. Using the Lesson Feature Phrase Repeat This function allows you to repeatedly practice difficult phrases, by selecting a phrase and repeatedly play it back. You can also mute one of the parts, and practice just the other part repeatedly. The specified phrase can also be practiced along with the Lesson modes “1 Listening,” “2 Timing” or “3 Waiting” described on page 31. Phrase mark NOTE • When you want to turn the Phrase Repeat function on, please make sure that the Keys to Success mode is off, since Phrase Repeat is not available in the Keys to Success mode. • When you want to change the Song, first turn off the Phrase Repeat function then select the Song. NOTE Repeat playback of this section Play the Song and press the [PHRASE REPEAT] button at the phrase you want to repeat. The appropriate phrase number will appear in the display and, after a lead-in, repeat playback will start. Appears when the Phrase Repeat function is on P03 • If you use the Phrase Repeat function with the Lesson modes “1 Listening,” “2 Timing” or “3 Waiting”, the evaluation function of these Lesson modes is not available. When you want to turn these Lesson modes off, press the [1 LISTENING 2 TIMING 3 WAITING] button a number of times to select off (“Phrase number” will appear in the display). REPEAT Phrase number Use the [+] or [-] buttons to select any phrase number in the Song, and stop repeat playback by pressing the [PHRASE REPEAT] button. The Phrase Repeat mode will be canceled and normal playback of the Song will continue. Specifying extended, multiple phrases You can specify an extended section for repeating (including multiple phrases) by specifying a beginning phrase (point A) and ending phrase (point B), using the [A-B REPEAT] button. You can do this either during playback or while playback is stopped. NOTE • Specifying only Point A results in repeat playback between Point A and the end of the Song. Press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning phrase of the section you want to repeat (point A), use the [+]/[-] buttons to select the subsequent phrases you wish to include in the repeat, then press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time. This specifies the last phrase selected as the end phrase (point B) for Phrase Repeat playback. “REPEAT” will appear on the display and the specified A-B section of the Song will now play repeatedly. (If playback is stopped, press the [START/STOP] button to start.) Stop A-B Repeat playback by pressing the [PHRASE REPEAT] button. “REPEAT” will appear on the display and the currently selected phrase will playback repeatedly. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 33 Using the Lesson Feature A-B Repeat This function lets you specify a section of a Song—“A” is the start point and “B” is the end point—for repeat playback. A B Repeat playback of this section Play the Song and press the [A-B REPEAT] button at the beginning of the section you want to repeat (the “A” point), then press the [A-B REPEAT] button a second time at the end of the section you want to repeat (the “B” point). The specified A-B section of the Song will now play repeatedly. A−b REPEAT NOTE • The repeat start and end points can be specified in one-measure increments. • You can also set the A-B Repeat function when the Song is stopped. Simply use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to select the desired measures, pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button for each point, then start playback. • If you want to set the start point “A” at the very beginning of the Song press the [A-B REPEAT] button before starting playback of the Song. You can stop repeat playback at any time by pressing the [A-B REPEAT] button. An “oFF REPEAT” message appears on the display. The A-B REPEAT mode will be canceled and normal playback of the Song will continue. NOTE • The A-B Repeat function will be canceled when you select another Song mode. Mute The Song is made up by several tracks. You can mute Track 1 or Track 2 during Song playback. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as desired, allowing you to listen to the corresponding part (the part that is turned on), or practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. • Track 1 can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 1] button during Song playback. • Track 2 or style track can be muted by pressing the [REC TRACK 2] button during Song playback. You can cancel the mute function by pressing the corresponding track buttons, [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] again during Song playback, or by selecting any other Song. 020 FrereJac 010 Pressing one of the Track buttons [TRACK 1] or [TRACK 2] will mute the corresponding track during Song playback. 34 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Lit: Track contains data. Unlit: Track is muted or contains no data. Using the Lesson Feature Using the Metronome The instrument features a built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) that is convenient for practicing. NOTE Press the [METRONOME] button to start the metronome. • You can set the time signature and the volume of the Metronome (page 43 Function 031–033). To stop the metronome, press the [METRONOME] button again. You can adjust the metronome tempo by pressing the [TEMPO/TAP] button (see next section). SHORTCUT You can jump directly to the Function settings by pressing and holding the [METRONOME] button for longer than a second. NOTE • The metronome time signature will synchronize to a style or song that is playing, so these parameters cannot be changed while a style or song is playing. Changing the Tempo Songs and Styles can be played at any tempo you desire—fast or slow. 1 Press the [TEMPO/TAP] button to call up the Tempo setting in the display. Current Tempo value 070 2 Tempo Set the Tempo by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. NOTE • Press the [+] and [-] buttons simultaneously to instantly reset the value to the default tempo. Tap Start You can supply a count-in at any tempo you like to start playback. Simply tap the [TEMPO/TAP] button at any tempo—four times for time signatures in 4, and three times for time signatures in 3—and the selected Song and Style rhythm will begin playing at the tapped tempo. You can change the tempo during Song or Style playback by pressing the button just twice. NOTE • In the case of a Style, the selected Style rhythm will begin playing at first. The bass and chords will begin playing as soon as you play a chord in the auto accompaniment range of the keyboard (when auto accompaniment is on). • Tap tempo setting range: 32–280 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 35 Record Your Own Performance You can record up to five of your own performances as User Songs (User 1–5: Song numbers 103–107). Think of each User Song as a kind of basket or drawer for storing your recordings. Remember that you can also record a Style (containing chord changes) along with your own performance. Recording 1 NOTICE Press the [REC] button. rEC User 1 001 Flashes • If all User Songs (Song numbers 103–107) contain recorded data, Song 103 will automatically be selected. In this case, you will record over and erase any previous data in Song 103, so be careful that you won’t be erasing any material you want to keep! The lowest-numbered unrecorded User Song (Song numbers 103–107) available for recording is displayed. If you want to select the Song you will be recording, select the desired Song number by using the [+] and [-] buttons. After you’ve selected the desired User Song for recording, you can select a Style to be recorded as well. To do this, press the [STYLE] button and select the Style number while the ACMP indication is on. NOTE • Accompaniment cannot be turned on or off once the [REC] button is pressed. You can turn off the Record mode by pressing the [REC] button again ( and stop flashing). 2 Start recording. When you play the keyboard, recording will begin. Split Point 36 48 60 72 By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when auto accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded with your performance. When auto accompaniment is set to off, only your keyboard performance is recorded. 36 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • A total of approximately 10,000 notes or 5,500 chord changes can be recorded to the five User Songs. Record Your Own Performance 3 Stop recording. Pressing the [START/STOP] button stops recording and writes the data to the User Song. (A “Writing!” message is shown.) To playback the newly recorded performance, press the [START/STOP] button. In order to record with the Style, turn auto accompaniment to on (see Step 2 on page 19), and then record according to the instructions. (The “ACMP ON” lights.) In order to record only your performance, turn auto accompaniment to off and record according to the normal steps. NOTICE • Never attempt to turn the power off when a “Writing!” message is shown in the display. Doing so can damage the flash memory device and result in a loss of data. NOTE • Use the Musicsoft Downloader to backup the User Songs to a computer (page 45). (The “ACMP ON” is unlit.) Recording to a Specific track The User Songs are organized into two tracks: Track 1 and Track 2. You can specify the track you want to record to. About track recording If you start recording by specifying a track, the track will be overwritten (existing data in the track is deleted and replaced with the new recording). User Song Data that can be recorded to Track 2 Data that can be recorded to Track 1 Style playback* (including chord changes) or your own keyboard performance Your own keyboard performance only NOTE • Record following the steps in the previous page, and your performance will be recorded to Track 1 and the Style (if you are playing one) will be recorded to Track 2. * When playing the Style Recording to the specified track Only your keyboard performance can be recorded to Track 1. Either a Style or your performance can be recorded to Track 2, resulting in a User Song like that depicted below. User Song User Song Track 2 Track 1 Track 2 Track 1 Style Your own keyboard performance Your own keyboard performance Your own keyboard performance NOTE • You cannot record the Reverb Level, metronome click, or the Transpose and Tuning settings. • The following settings and buttons cannot be changed, or if changed, the new settings cannot be recorded if entered during the recording process. ACMP ON/OFF, Split Point, Reverb Type, Chorus Type, Harmony Type, [FUNCTION] button, [PORTABLE GRAND] button. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 37 Record Your Own Performance Selecting a specific track for recording 1 Turn ACMP (auto accompaniment) on or off, depending on what you want to record. If you want to record Style playback, turn ACMP on. If you want to record only your own keyboard performance, turn ACMP off. 2 Specify the track you want to record. Specify Track 2 when you want to record the Style. When you want to record your own keyboard performance, you can specify either track. • Keep in mind that both Tracks 1 and 2 will be overwritten with new data if you record without specifying the tracks. • The both “L” and “R” flashes, this indicates that you have specified Track 1 when auto accompaniment is on. If you want to record your own performance, press the [TRACK 2] button to stop the “L” flashing. If you want to record a Style, press the [REC] button to cancel the recording, and repeat the procedure from the beginning.  Recording to Track 1 While holding the [REC] button, press the [REC TRACK 1] button. rEC NOTE User 1 001 Press simultaneously Flashes when Track 1 is selected for recording.  Recording to Track 2 While holding the [REC] button, press the [REC TRACK 2] button. rEC 001 Press simultaneously 3 Flashes when track 2 is selected for recording. User 1 Lights when recorded data exists. Turns off when there is no recorded data, or when Mute is set to on (page 34) to turn off playback of the track. Press the [+], [-] buttons to select the User Song you want to record. rEC User 3 If you want to record Style playback to Track 2, press the [STYLE] button and select the desired Style. 4 38 Start recording Perform steps 2 and 3 on pages 36–37. By playing keys to the left of the Split Point when auto accompaniment is set to on, the Style starts sounding and is recorded. Only your performance is recorded by playing the keyboard (any key is OK) when auto accompaniment is set to off. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • If you want to record only the rhythm (percussion) part, press the [START/STOP] button to play just the rhythm, then add the section change by pressing the [INTO/ENDING/rit.] button or [MAIN/AUTO FILL] button. • You can record a new track while listening to a previously recorded track (the track indication will appear). You can also mute recorded tracks (the track will disappear) while recording a new track by pressing the desired track button. Record Your Own Performance Deleting User Songs NOTE Deleting an entire User Song. • You cannot delete a specific track from a User Song. 1 Press the [SONG] button and select the User Song you want to delete by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. 103 2 User 1 Press and hold the [REC] button for longer than a second. The Song Delete display appears. YES ClrUser1 Hold for longer than a second. You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button. 3 Press the [+/YES] button. A confirmation message will appear on the display. YES Sure? You can cancel the delete operation by pressing the [-/NO] button. 4 Press the [+/YES] button to delete the Song. “Writing!” message will appear while the track is being deleted. 000 Writing! PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 39 Backup and Initialization Backup The following settings are always backed up, and are maintained even when the power is turned off. If you want to initialize the settings, use the Initialize operation “Initialization” as explained below. NOTE Backup parameters • User Songs • Style Number 107 • Touch Response on/off • Passing status of Song and Step • FUNCTION Settings: Tuning, Split Point, Touch Sensitivity, Style Volume, Song Volume, Metronome Volume, Your Tempo, Demo Group, Demo Play Mode, Demo Cancel, Master EQ type, Panel Sustain, Auto Power Off • You can save the settings as backup data to your computer, by using the Musicsoft Downloader (MSD) software. Refer to the section “Transferring data between the instrument and a computer” on page 45. Initialization This function erases all backup data in the instrument’s flash memory and restores the initial default settings. The following initialization procedures are provided. Initialization To clear data backed up to the internal flash memory turn the power on by pressing the [ ] (Standby/On) switch while holding the highest white key on the keyboard. The backed up data will be erased and the default values restored. Initialization does not delete the files transferred from the computer. If you want to delete the files, see “Deleting Files” below. NOTICE • When you execute the Initialization, backup parameters will be cleared. Deleting Files To clear song and style files that have been transferred to the internal flash memory NOTICE • When you delete the files, from a computer, turn the power on by pressing the [ ] (Standby/On) switch while Song data and Style data simultaneously holding the highest white key on the keyboard and the three highest you have purchased and downloaded will also be black keys. cleared. Make sure to save your important data by transferring to a computer using Musicsoft Downloader (page 45). 40 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Function Settings The [FUNCTION] button gives you access to a variety of operations related to adjusting or enhancing the sound and making settings for connection to external devices. For more about the available functions, see the following Function Setting List. Select the item and change the value 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the desired item appears. Each time the [FUNCTION] button is pressed, the Function number increases one by one. You can also decrease the Function number by one when you press the [-] button briefly while holding down the [FUNCTION] button. Value 100 NOTE • The Function number will not appear in the display during Song, Style or metronome playback. The measure will appear instead. Function item StyleVol 001 Function number If the Function includes sub-modes, the Function item appears in the display for a few seconds, and the sub-modes will be displayed. 2 Set the value by using the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-]. Direct numeric entry. NOTE • Some Function settings are stored in memory as soon as they are changed. See “The Backup Parameters” on page 40 for information on the Function settings that are stored on the instrument. • To exit the Function settings, press one of these buttons; [SONG], [VOICE],[STYLE] or [GRAND PIANO]. • Decrement value by 1. • No • Off • Increment value by 1. • Yes • On Press simultaneously to recall the default setting. Function Setting List No. Item Display Range/ settings Default setting Description Volume 001 Style Volume StyleVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Style. 002 Song Volume SongVol 100 Determines the volume of the Song. 00 Determines the pitch of the instrument in semitone increments. NOTE: The pitch of the Drum Kits Voices cannot be changed. 440.0 (Hz) Determines the fine tuning of the pitch of the entire instrument in approx. 0.2Hz increments. NOTE: The pitch of the Drum Kits Voices cannot be changed. 54 (F#2) Determines the highest key for the Split Voice and sets the Split “point”—in other words, the key that separates the Split (lower) and Main (upper) Voices. The Split Point setting and Accompaniment Split Point setting are automatically set to the same value. 2 Medium When Touch Response is on, this determines the sensitivity of the feature. Higher values produce greater (easier) volume variation in response to keyboard dynamics. 000–127 Overall 003 Transpose Transpos -12–00–12 004 Tuning Tuning 427.0–453.0 (Hz) 005 Split Point SplitPnt 000–127 (C-2–G8) 006 Touch Sensitivity 1 Soft TouchSns 2 Medium 3 Hard PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 41 Function Settings No. Item Display Range/ settings Default setting Description Style File 007 Style Register StyleReg 001–nnn – Select and register a Style file from flash files that are loaded from computer (page 46). Main Voice 008 Main Voice Volume M.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Main Voice to adjust the balance between Song playback and the notes you play on the keyboard. 009 Main Voice Octave M.Octave -2–0–2 * Determines the octave range for the Main Voice. 010 Main Voice Chorus Send Level M.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Main Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. * Selects the Dual Voice. Dual Voice 011 Dual Voice D.Voice 012 Dual Voice Volume D.Volume 0–127 * Determines the volume of the Dual Voice. 013 Dual Voice Octave D.Octave * Determines the octave range for the Dual Voice. 014 Dual Voice Chorus Send Level D.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Dual Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. Selects the Split Voice. 001–497 -2–0–2 Split Voice 015 Split Voice S.Voice 001–497 * 016 Split Voice Volume S.Volume 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Split Voice. 017 Split Voice Octave S.Octave -2–0–2 * Determines the octave range for the Split Voice. 018 Split Voice Chorus Send Level S.Chorus 000–127 * Determines how much of the Split Voice’s signal is sent to the Chorus effect. 019 Reverb Type Reverb ** Determines the Reverb type, including off (10). Refer to the Reverb Type list on page 67. 020 Reverb Level RevLevel 000–127 64 Determines how much of the Voice’s signal is sent to the Reverb effect. 021 Chorus Type Chorus 1–5 ** Determines the Chorus type, including off (05). Refer to the Chorus Type list on page 67. 022 Panel Sustain Sustain ON/OFF 023 Master EQ Type MasterEQ 1 Speaker 2 Flat 024 Wide Type Wide 1–3 Effect 01–10 OFF Determines whether or not Panel Sustain is always applied to the Main/Dual/Split Voices. Panel Sustain is applied continuously when ON, or not applied when OFF. 1 Speaker Sets the equalizer applied to the speaker output for optimum sound in different listening situations. Speaker: For listening via the instrument’s built-in speakers. Flat: For headphones, or for listening via external speakers. 2 Determines the Ultra-Wide Stereo type. Higher values produce a greater Wide effect. Harmony 025 Harmony Type HarmType 01– 26 * Determines the Harmony type. Refer to the Harmony Type list on page 67. 026 Harmony Volume HarmVol 000–127 * Determines the volume of the Harmony effect when one of the Harmony types 1–5 is selected. PC Mode PC mode OFF/PC1/PC2 OFF Optimizes the MIDI settings when you connect to a computer (page 43). MIDI 027 42 028 Local On/Off Local ON/OFF ON Determines whether the instrument’s keyboard controls the internal tone generator (ON) or not (OFF). On Both the notes played on the instrument’s keyboard and data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will be played by the internal tone generator. Off With this setting, the instrument itself produces no sound, but the performance data is transmitted via the MIDI terminal. Data received via the instrument’s MIDI terminal will also be played by the internal tone generator. 029 External Clock ExtClock ON/OFF OFF Determines whether the instrument synchronizes to the internal clock (OFF) or an external clock (ON). PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Function Settings No. 030 Item Initial Setup Send Range/ settings Display Default setting Description InitSend YES/NO – Lets you send the data of the panel settings to a computer. Use the [+] button to transmit the data. ** Determines the time signature of the Metronome. A chime will sound on the first beat of each measure while the other beats will click. All beats will simply click with no chime at the beginning of each measure if you set this parameter to “00”. ** Sets the length of each metronome beat. Metronome 031 Time Signature Numerator TimeSigN 00–60 032 Time Signature Denominator TimeSigD 033 Metronome Volume MetroVol 000–127 100 Determines the volume of the Metronome. Half note, Quarter note, Eighth note, Sixteenth note Lesson 034 Lesson Track (R) R-Part 01–16 01 Determines the guide track number for your right hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred Songs for Lessons” on page 46. 035 Lesson Track (L) L-Part 01–16 02 Determines the guide track number for your left hand lesson. The setting is only effective for Songs in SMF format 0 transferred from a computer. Refer to the section “Using Transferred Songs for Lessons” on page 46. 036 Your Tempo YourTemp ON/OFF ON Determines whether the song playback tempo matches the speed at which you are playing (ON) or not (OFF), when using the “Waiting” Lesson mode. Demo 037 Demo Group DemoGrp 1 DEMO 2 Preset 3 User 4 Download 038 Demo Play Mode PlayMode 1 Normal 2 Random 039 Demo Cancel D-Cancel ON/OFF 1 DEMO Determines the repeat playback group. 1 Normal Determines the repeat playback mode. OFF Determines whether Demo cancel is enabled or not. When this is set to ON, the Demo Song will not play, even if the [DEMO/ BGM] button is pressed. Power Save 040 Auto Power Off AutoOff OFF/5/10/15/ 30/60/120 (minutes) 30 Specifies the time that will elapse before the instrument’s power is automatically turned off. * Different for each voice combination. ** Different for each Song or Style combination.  PC Mode (FUNCTION 027) The PC settings instantly reconfigure all important MIDI settings (as shown below). PC1 PC2 OFF On LOCAL Off Off EXTERNAL CLOCK On Off Off SONG OUT* Off Off On STYLE OUT** Off Off On KEYBOARD OUT*** Off On On NOTE • Song Out, Style Out and Keyboard Out can only be changed by the PC setting. They cannot be set independently. Song Out can be used with User Songs. * Determines whether Song data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Song playback. ** Determines whether Style data is transmitted (ON) via MIDI or not (OFF) during Style playback. *** Determines whether keyboard performance data of the instrument is transmitted (ON) or not (OFF). PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 43 Connecting to a Computer This instrument can be connected to a computer to allow transfer of MIDI data or a file. MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a world-standard interface for communication between electronic musical instruments and music devices. MIDI settings such as Local Control are made in the Function settings (page 42 Function 027–030). Connecting a Personal Computer 1 2 Turn off the power of the instrument before connecting a USB cable. 3 Connect the instrument and the computer via a USB cable. Turn on the power of the computer. Quit any open application software on the computer. USB terminal USB terminal Instrument USB cable 4 Turn on the power of the instrument. When you connect the instrument to a computer for the first time, the driver is installed automatically. Operating System (OS) Windows XP (SP3 or later)/Windows Vista *Only 32-bit, Windows 7, Mac OS X Version 10.5.0–10.6.x When data communication is unstable or some problem occurs even though you’ve executed the above instructions, download the Yamaha Standard USBMIDI driver from the following URL then install it to your computer. For instructions on installation, refer to the Install Guide included in the package file. http://download.yamaha.com/ For details about OS for Yamaha Standard USB-MIDI driver, visit the URL above.  Precautions when using the USB terminal When connecting the computer to the USB terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks freezing the computer and corrupting or losing the data. If the computer or the instrument freezes, restart the application software or the computer OS, or turn the power to the instrument off then on again. NOTICE • Use an AB type USB cable of less than about 3 meters. USB 3.0 cables cannot be used. • Before connecting the computer to the USB terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as suspend, sleep, standby). • Before turning on the power to the instrument, connect the computer to the USB terminal. • Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument on/off or plugging/unplugging the USB cable to/from the USB terminal. • Quit any open application software on the computer. • Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the keyboard or playing back a song.) • While the computer is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations: (1) when turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or (2) when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB cable. 44 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Connecting to a Computer Transferring data between the instrument and a computer This instrument includes 102 preset Songs and 106 Styles, but you can load other Songs and Styles from your computer and use them in the same way as the preset Songs and Styles as long as the loaded Song is SMF format 0* or the loaded Style is SFF (Style File Format). Loaded Song data will be stored to Song numbers beginning with 108 and one of the loaded Style/s can be registered as the 107th Style. In order to perform the operations described in this section you will need to use a computer connected to the Internet to download the free Musicsoft Downloader application. * The SMF (Standard MIDI File) format is one of the most common and widely compatible sequence formats used for storing sequence data. Most commercially available MIDI sequence data is provided in SMF Format 0. Installing Musicsoft Downloader NOTE You can download the “Musicsoft Downloader” application from the following website. Make sure that your computer has an Internet connection. • Visit the Yamaha website for more information on the latest version of Musicsoft Downloader (version 5.6.1 or higher) and how to install it. http://download.yamaha.com/ Please visit the URL above to get the information on the computer system requirements for Musicsoft Downloader. Transferring Data by using the Musicsoft Downloader You can transmit Song files and Style Files from your computer to the Flash Memory on your instrument by Musicsoft Downloader. You can also transfer backup data (page 40) other than the “Passing status of Song and Step” to a computer as a backup file. For Musicsoft Downloader operating instructions see the Help menu: launch the Musicsoft Downloader application and click “Help.” Data that can be loaded to this instrument from a computer • Songs : 256 Songs max (Song numbers 108–) • Data : Approx. 1.7MB • Data Format : SMF Format 0 and 1 • File : 11PK3.BUP (Backup file) ***.mid (MIDI Song) ***.sty (Style File) Musicsoft Downloader Operations Move the file from the computer to “Flash Memory” under “Electronic Musical Instruments.” NOTE • The Musicsoft Downloader application may not be able to access the instrument in the following cases: • During Style playback • During Song playback NOTICE • Use the power adaptor when transferring data. The data can be corrupted if the batteries fail during the transfer. • Never turn the power off and never plug/unplug the AC power adaptor during data transmission. Not only will the data fail to be transferred and saved, but operation of the flash memory may become unstable and its contents may disappear completely when the power is turned on or off. NOTE • Close the window to exit from the Musicsoft Downloader and re-enable control of the instrument. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 45 Connecting to a Computer NOTE Data that can be transferred to a computer from this instrument • Backup file (11PK3.BUP: backup data containing five User Songs) • Songs transferred from a computer Musicsoft Downloader Operations Move the file from “System Drive” under “Electronic Musical Instruments” to the computer. • Preset Song data cannot be transmitted from this instrument • “Passing status of Song and Step” cannot be transferred from this instrument as a “backup file.” NOTICE Erasing Transferred Song Data from Internal Memory To erase all Songs transferred from the computer, use the “Deleting Files” function on page 40. To erase specific Songs transferred from the computer, use the Delete function on Musicsoft Downloader. Using Transferred Songs for Lessons In order to use Songs (only SMF format 0) transferred from a computer for lessons it is necessary to specify which channels are to be played back as the righthand and left-hand parts. Refer to the “Lesson Track (R)” or “Lesson Track (L)” in the Function Setting List on page 43. The procedure for setting the guide track is as follows: Select a transferred Song you want to use for lessons. Press the [FUNCTION] button a number of times until the “R-Part” or “L-Part” appears in the display, and then use the number buttons [0]–[9], [+], [-] to select the channel you want to play back as the specified right- or left-hand part. We recommend that you select channel 1 for the right-hand part and channel 2 for the left-hand part. • The backup data, including the five User Songs is transmitted/received as a single file. As a result, all backup data (including the five Songs) will be overwritten every time you transmit or receive. Keep this in mind when transferring data. • Do not rename the backup file on the computer. If you do so, it will not be recognized when transferred to the instrument. Registering Style Files This instrument features 106 internal Styles, but other Styles, such as those which can be obtained from the internet (only Styles with the “.sty” suffix), can be registered to Style number 107 and used in the same way as the internal Styles. In order to use the Style File register function, the file must already have been transferred from the computer to the instrument. The procedure for transferring files from a computer to the instrument is described on page 45 (“Transferring data between the instrument and a computer”). The procedure described below registers a Style file that has already been transferred from a computer to the instrument to Style number 107. 1 Press the [FUNCTION] button as many times as necessary to select the Style File Load function “StyleReg” (Function 007). After about 2 seconds the name of a registerable Style file will appear in the display. If multiple loadable Style files have been transferred to the instrument, you can use the [+] and [-] buttons to select the other files in sequence. 2 Execute the register operation. With the name of the Style file you want to register shown in the display, press the number [0] button. 3 A confirmation message for the register operation will appear. Press the [+/YES] button to actually register the file. 46 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual StyleReg Appendix Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause and Solution When the instrument is turned on or off, a popping sound is temporarily produced. This is normal and indicates that the instrument is receiving electrical power. When using a mobile phone, noise is produced. Using a mobile phone in close proximity to the instrument may produce interference. To prevent this, turn off the mobile phone or use it further away from the instrument. There is no sound even when the keyboard is played or when a song or style is being played back. Check that nothing is connected to the PHONES/OUTPUT jack on the rear panel. When a set of headphones is plugged into this jack, no sound is output. Check the Local Control on/off setting. (See page 42 Function 028.) Not all of the voices seem to sound, or the sound seems to be cut off. The instrument is polyphonic up to a maximum of 32 notes — including Dual voice, Split Voice, auto accompaniment, song, and Metronome. Notes exceeding this limit will not sound. Playing keys in the right hand area of the keyboard does not produce any sound. When using the Dictionary function (page 22), the keys in the right hand area are used only for entering the chord root and type. The Style or Song does not play back when the [START/ Is External Clock set to ON? Make sure External Clock is set to OFF; refer to STOP] button is pressed. “Function Settings” on page 42 (Function 029). The ACMP ON indicator does not appear when the [ACMP ON/OFF] button is pressed. Always press the [STYLE] button first when you are going to use any Stylerelated function. Make sure that the Style Volume (page 41 Function 001) is set to an appropriate level. Is the Split Point set to an appropriate key for the chords you are playing? Set the Split Point to an appropriate key (page 41 Function 005). Is the “ACMP ON” indicator showing in the display? If it is not showing, press the [ACMP ON/OFF] button so that it does show. The Style does not sound properly. • The auto accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g., some minor chords followed by the minor seventh). • Two-note fingerings will produce a chord based on the previously played chord. • Playing two same root keys in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based only on the root. The footswitch (for sustain) seems to produce the oppo- The polarity of the footswitch is reversed. Make sure that the footswitch plug is site effect. For example, pressing the footswitch cuts off properly connected to the SUSTAIN jack before turning on the power. the sound and releasing it sustains the sounds. The sound of the voice changes from note to note. This is normal. The AWM tone generation method uses multiple recordings (samples) of an instrument across the range of the keyboard; thus, the actual sound of the voice may be slightly different from note to note. The harmony doesn’t sound. The method of sounding the harmony effect (01–26) differs depending on the selected type. For Types 01–05, turn the Auto Accompaniment on and play it by pressing a chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard, then play some keys in the right-hand side to get the harmony effect. For Types 06–26, turning auto accompaniment on or off has no effect. However, it is necessary to play two notes simultaneously for Types 06–12. • • • • The volume is too soft. The sound quality is poor. The rhythm stops unexpectedly or will not play. The batteries are low or dead. Replace all six batteries with completely new The recorded data of the song, etc. does not play corones, or use the optional AC adaptor. rectly. • The LCD display suddenly goes dark, and all panel settings are reset. Power suddenly and unexpectedly turns off. This is normal and the Auto Power Off function may have been activated (page 9). If you need to disable the Auto Power Off function, select “Off” in the Function settings (page 43 Function 040). PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 47 Song Book Sample This score is provided with the part of the song book (free downloadable scores). The song book contains not only the scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3) but also music terms and important points for your practice. To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. Yamaha Online Member https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ * The Song book is provided in English, French, German and Spanish. This example introduces part of the English song book. Für Elise L. v. Beethoven Basic Song No.004 Für Elise With Step Map .......................................................................12 Für Elise is an all-time classical favorite. The beautiful, well-known melody is repeated a number of times. In each step you won’t be practicing alone. You have a wonderful orchestra to back you up! First, listen to the example a few times. It won’t be long before you’ll want to start playing it yourself! Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” .................................... 14 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 15 Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment”..................................... 16 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 16 First Half Review ...................................................................... 17 Diligent Practice Time ................................................................ 17 Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” .................................... 18 “EEEEE!” ................................................................................ 18 “Left! Right! Left! Right!” ............................................................ 19 Second Half Review ................................................................... 19 Play the Whole Song! ................................................................. 19 48 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Before Playing... Sit Correctly Finger Numbering 3 2 4 3 2 4 5 5 1 1 Left Right Sit near the middle of the keyboard. Reading the Score The Keyboard, Staff Lines, and Clef 1 octave 2 black keys C D E 3 black keys F G A B C D E F G A B M i d d l e C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C D E F G A B C Treble clef Bass clef Accidentals B N (Sharp) Raise a semitone (Flat) Lower a semitone (Natural) Return to normal pitch 1 2 3 4 Whole note Whole note rest Dotted half note Dotted half note rest Half note Half note rest Dotted quarter note Dotted quarter note rest Quarter note Time signature Notes and Rests Key signature Clef Quarter note rest Eighth note Eighth note rest Sixteenth note Sixteenth note rest Time Signatures and Counting Time 4/4 time 2/2 time 2/4 time 3/4 time 6/8 time 9/8 time PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 49 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Basic Für Elise With Step Map Play with both hands as if gently telling a story. It might help to sing or hum the melody as you play. Similar melody lines and rhythms are repeated in this song, so there aren’t as many sections to practice as you might think. Enjoy learning each section as you build proﬁciency. From here... 50 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 ...to here Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic From here... ...to here PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 51 Song Book Sample Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Let’s start with a warm-up exercise using three ﬁngers of the right hand. ise Warm-up Exercise - “The Semitone Mystery” ed for this us erc ex Finge rs Song No.004 Right We’ll start by ascending and descending the white and black keys. Check out the illustrations until you understand how the fingers are supposed to move, then get started! You’ll ﬁnd it easier to play if you bend your ﬁngers slightly. M i d d l e C M i d d l e E C A E M i d d l e C A B C D Tip-toe Go back to the beginning and play it again. 52 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic Diligent Practice Time Right! Now that we’re warmed up let’s try playing along with the orchestra in 3/4 time. The melody will be built up little by little. Compare each line... notice that many of the shapes formed by the notes are very similar. Short break Almost done E PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 53 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic M i d d l e Left hand Warm-up Exercise - “Basic Accompaniment” E A E A And now a warm-up exercise for the left hand. It’s important to spread your ﬁngers widely from the start. Don’t play the black keys too strongly. Diligent Practice Time Connect the notes smoothly, as if the left hand were passing them to the right hand. You’ll be able to play smoothly if you move the left hand into position for the next phrase as soon as it ﬁnishes playing the ﬁrst phrase. 54 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual C Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic First Half Review You’ve reached the halfway step! Have you learned all the material provided in the preceding steps? Now let’s go back and play through all the first-half exercises. If you find that you’re having trouble playing any of the material, go back and review the steps using the Step Map as a guide. Diligent Practice Time OK, let’s begin the second half! You’ll be able to play the melody nicely if you lift your ﬁngers from the keyboard between the slurs. It might be easier to grasp the key release timing if you sing along with the melody. Don’t panic and play too strongly where the left hand has to play short notes. Always have left-hand ﬁnger 5 ready to play the next note! PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 55 Song Book Sample Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Left hand Jump to the next E! And again! Warm-up Exercise - “The Jump Competition” The ﬁrst note has a staccato dot. Spread your ﬁngers wide and jump quickly to the next note! M i d d l e E ngers! se fi You can play t with only the his “EEEEE!” The only note in this step is E! Make the connection between the left and right hands as smooth as possible. 56 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual E C E Song Book Sample Song No.004 Song No.004 Für Elise Basic Für Elise Basic “Left! Right! Left! Right!” Play “D E” repeatedly, alternating the left and right hands. Have the next hand ready in position to play D so you won’t have to rush. Left Right Second Half Review Try playing all the way through the second half. As we did after the ﬁrst half, if there are places you can’t play with conﬁdence go back and review the steps. Play the Whole Song! This is the ﬁnishing step! Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. Just concentrate on playing the entire song from start to finish. Practice this with the lessons learned in each step in mind, and gradually you’ll master the whole song. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 57 Voice List Maximum Polyphony The instrument has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it can play a maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used. Auto accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when auto accompaniment is used the total number of available notes for playing on the keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Split Voice and Song functions. If the maximum polyphony is exceeded, earlier played notes will be cut off and the most recent notes have priority (last note priority). Panel Voice List Voice No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 58 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) PIANO 0 112 1 Grand Piano 0 112 2 Bright Piano 0 112 7 Harpsichord 0 112 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 112 3 MIDI Grand Piano 0 113 3 CP 80 E.PIANO 0 114 5 Cool! Galaxy Electric Piano 0 113 6 Hyper Tines 0 112 5 Funky Electric Piano 0 112 6 DX Modern Electric Piano 0 114 6 Venus Electric Piano 0 112 8 Clavi ORGAN 0 112 17 Jazz Organ 1 0 113 17 Jazz Organ 2 0 112 19 Rock Organ 0 114 19 Purple Organ 0 112 18 Click Organ 0 116 17 Bright Organ 0 127 19 Theater Organ 0 121 20 16'+2' Organ 0 120 20 16'+4' Organ 0 113 20 Chapel Organ 0 112 20 Pipe Organ 0 112 21 Reed Organ ACCORDION 0 112 22 Musette Accordion 0 113 22 Traditional Accordion 0 113 24 Bandoneon 0 112 23 Harmonica GUITAR 0 112 25 Classical Guitar 0 112 26 Folk Guitar 0 112 27 Jazz Guitar 0 117 28 60’s Clean Guitar 0 113 26 12Strings Guitar 0 112 28 Clean Guitar 0 113 27 Octave Guitar 0 112 29 Muted Guitar 0 112 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 112 31 Distortion Guitar BASS 0 112 34 Finger Bass 0 112 33 Acoustic Bass 0 112 35 Pick Bass 0 112 36 Fretless Bass 0 112 37 Slap Bass 0 112 39 Synth Bass 0 113 39 Hi-Q Bass 0 113 40 Dance Bass STRINGS 0 112 49 String Ensemble PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual NOTE • The Voice List includes MIDI program change numbers for each voice. Use these program change numbers when playing the instrument via MIDI from an external device. • Program Numbers 001 to 128 directly relate to MIDI Program Change Numbers 000 to 127. That is, Program Numbers and Program Change Numbers differ by a value of 1. Remember to take this into consideration. • Some voices may sound continuously or have a long decay after the notes have been released while the sustain pedal (footswitch) is held. Voice No. 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 112 50 Chamber Strings 0 113 50 Slow Strings 0 112 45 Tremolo Strings 0 112 51 Synth Strings 0 112 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 112 41 Violin 0 112 43 Cello 0 112 44 Contrabass 0 112 47 Harp 0 112 106 Banjo 0 112 56 Orchestra Hit CHOIR 0 112 53 Choir 0 113 53 Vocal Ensemble 0 112 55 Air Choir 0 112 54 Vox Humana SAXOPHONE 0 112 67 Tenor Sax 0 112 66 Alto Sax 0 112 65 Soprano Sax 0 112 68 Baritone Sax 0 114 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 112 72 Clarinet 0 112 69 Oboe 0 112 70 English Horn 0 112 71 Bassoon TRUMPET 0 112 57 Trumpet 0 112 58 Trombone 0 113 58 Trombone Section 0 112 60 Muted Trumpet 0 112 61 French Horn 0 112 59 Tuba BRASS 0 112 62 Brass Section 0 113 62 Big Band Brass 0 113 63 80’s Brass 0 119 62 Mellow Horns 0 114 63 Techno Brass 0 112 63 Synth Brass FLUTE 0 112 74 Flute 0 112 73 Piccolo 0 112 76 Pan Flute 0 112 75 Recorder 0 112 80 Ocarina SYNTH 0 112 81 Square Lead 0 112 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 115 82 Analogon 0 119 82 Fargo 0 112 99 Star Dust 0 112 86 Voice Lead 0 112 101 Brightness 0 112 92 Xenon Pad 0 112 95 Equinox Voice List Voice No. 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 112 89 Fantasia 0 113 90 Dark Moon 0 113 101 Bell Pad PERCUSSION 0 112 12 Vibraphone 0 112 13 Marimba 0 112 14 Xylophone 0 112 115 Steel Drums 0 112 9 Celesta 0 112 11 Music Box 0 112 15 Tubular Bells 0 112 48 Timpani WORLD 0 115 111 Er Hu 0 117 74 Di Zi 0 116 106 Pi Pa 0 0 105 Sitar 0 0 16 Dulcimer 0 98 106 Oud 0 0 107 Shamisen 0 113 108 GuZheng 0 0 108 Koto 0 0 109 Kalimba 0 0 110 Bagpipe 0 0 111 Fiddle 0 0 112 Shanai 126 0 128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc. DUAL* 0 112 1 Octave Piano 0 112 1 Piano + Strings 0 112 1 Piano Pad 0 0 6 E.P. Pad 0 0 49 Octave Strings 0 0 62 Octave Brass 0 0 49 Orchestra Tutti 0 0 53 Octave Choir 0 0 62 Jazz Section 0 0 74 Flute & Clarinet SOUND EFFECTS 0 0 121 Fret Noise 0 0 122 Breath Noise 0 0 123 Seashore 0 0 124 Bird Tweet 0 0 125 Telephone Ring 0 0 126 Helicopter 0 0 127 Applause 0 0 128 Gunshot DRUM KITS 127 0 1 Standard Kit 1 127 0 2 Standard Kit 2 127 0 9 Room Kit 127 0 17 Rock Kit 127 0 25 Electronic Kit 127 0 26 Analog Kit 127 0 113 Dance Kit 127 0 33 Jazz Kit 127 0 41 Brush Kit 127 0 49 Symphony Kit 126 0 1 SFX Kit 1 126 0 2 SFX Kit 2 126 0 113 Sound Effect Kit * When you select a Voice of the DUAL category, two voices sound at the same time. The Voice whose MIDI program change number is indicated in the Voice List is known as the Main Voice. XGlite Voice/XGlite Optional Voice* List Voice No. 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 *170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG PIANO 0 0 1 Grand Piano 0 1 1 Grand Piano KSP 0 40 1 Piano Strings 0 41 1 Dream 0 0 2 Bright Piano 0 1 2 Bright Piano KSP 0 0 3 Electric Grand Piano 0 1 3 Electric Grand Piano KSP 0 32 3 Detuned CP80 0 0 4 Honky-tonk Piano 0 1 4 Honky-tonk Piano KSP 0 0 5 Electric Piano 1 0 1 5 Electric Piano 1 KSP 0 32 5 Chorus Electric Piano 1 0 0 6 Electric Piano 2 0 1 6 Electric Piano 2 KSP 0 32 6 Chorus Electric Piano 2 0 41 6 DX + Analog Electric Piano 0 0 7 Harpsichord 0 1 7 Harpsichord KSP 0 35 7 Harpsichord 2 0 0 8 Clavi 0 1 8 Clavi KSP XG CHROMATIC 0 0 9 Celesta 0 0 10 Glockenspiel 0 0 11 Music Box 0 64 11 Orgel 0 0 12 Vibraphone 0 1 12 Vibraphone KSP 0 0 13 Marimba 0 1 13 Marimba KSP 0 64 13 Sine Marimba 0 97 13 Balimba 0 98 13 Log Drums 0 0 14 Xylophone 0 0 15 Tubular Bells 0 96 15 Church Bells 0 97 15 Carillon 0 35 16 Dulcimer 2 0 96 16 Cimbalom 0 97 16 Santur XG ORGAN 0 0 17 Drawbar Organ 0 32 17 Detuned Drawbar Organ 0 33 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 1 0 34 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 2 0 35 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 1 0 37 17 60’s Drawbar Organ 3 0 40 17 16+2'2/3 0 64 17 Organ Bass 0 65 17 70’s Drawbar Organ 2 0 66 17 Cheezy Organ 0 67 17 Drawbar Organ 2 0 0 18 Percussive Organ 0 24 18 70’s Percussive Organ 0 32 18 Detuned Percussive Organ 0 33 18 Light Organ 0 37 18 Percussive Organ 2 0 0 19 Rock Organ 0 64 19 Rotary Organ 0 65 19 Slow Rotary 0 66 19 Fast Rotary 0 0 20 Church Organ 0 32 20 Church Organ 3 0 35 20 Church Organ 2 0 40 20 Notre Dame 0 64 20 Organ Flute 0 65 20 Tremolo Organ Flute 0 0 21 Reed Organ PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 59 Voice List Voice No. 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 *278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 60 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 40 21 Puff Organ 0 0 22 Accordion 0 0 23 Harmonica 0 32 23 Harmonica 2 0 0 24 Tango Accordion 0 64 24 Tango Accordion 2 XG GUITAR 0 0 25 Nylon Guitar 0 43 25 Velocity Guitar Harmonics 0 96 25 Ukulele 0 0 26 Steel Guitar 0 35 26 12-string Guitar 0 40 26 Nylon & Steel Guitar 0 41 26 Steel Guitar with Body Sound 0 96 26 Mandolin 0 0 27 Jazz Guitar 0 32 27 Jazz Amp 0 0 28 Clean Guitar 0 32 28 Chorus Guitar 0 0 29 Muted Guitar 0 40 29 Funk Guitar 0 41 29 Muted Steel Guitar 0 45 29 Jazz Man 0 0 30 Overdriven Guitar 0 43 30 Guitar Pinch 0 0 31 Distortion Guitar 0 40 31 Feedback Guitar 0 41 31 Feedback Guitar 2 0 0 32 Guitar Harmonics 0 65 32 Guitar Feedback 0 66 32 Guitar Harmonics 2 XG BASS 0 0 33 Acoustic Bass 0 40 33 Jazz Rhythm Velocity Crossfade Upright Bass 0 45 33 0 0 34 Finger Bass 0 18 34 Finger Dark Bass & Distorted Electric Guitar 0 40 34 0 43 34 Finger Slap Bass 0 45 34 Finger Bass 2 0 65 34 Modulated Bass 0 0 35 Pick Bass 0 28 35 Muted Pick Bass 0 0 36 Fretless Bass 0 32 36 Fretless Bass 2 0 33 36 Fretless Bass 3 0 34 36 Fretless Bass 4 0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 0 32 37 Punch Thumb Bass 0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 0 43 38 Velocity Switch Slap 0 0 39 Synth Bass 1 0 40 39 Techno Synth Bass 0 0 40 Synth Bass 2 0 6 40 Mellow Synth Bass 0 12 40 Sequenced Bass 0 18 40 Click Synth Bass 0 19 40 Synth Bass 2 Dark 0 40 40 Modular Synth Bass 0 41 40 DX Bass XG STRINGS 0 0 41 Violin 0 8 41 Slow Violin 0 0 42 Viola 0 0 43 Cello 0 0 44 Contrabass 0 0 45 Tremolo Strings 0 8 45 Slow Tremolo Strings 0 40 45 Suspense Strings 0 0 46 Pizzicato Strings 0 0 47 Orchestral Harp 0 40 47 Yang Chin 0 0 48 Timpani PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Voice No. 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) XG ENSEMBLE 0 0 49 Strings 1 0 3 49 Stereo Strings 0 8 49 Slow Strings 0 35 49 60’s Strings 0 40 49 Orchestra 0 41 49 Orchestra 2 0 42 49 Tremolo Orchestra 0 45 49 Velocity Strings 0 0 50 Strings 2 0 3 50 Stereo Slow Strings 0 8 50 Legato Strings 0 40 50 Warm Strings 0 41 50 Kingdom 0 0 51 Synth Strings 1 0 0 52 Synth Strings 2 0 0 53 Choir Aahs 0 3 53 Stereo Choir 0 32 53 Mellow Choir 0 40 53 Choir Strings 0 0 54 Voice Oohs 0 0 55 Synth Voice 0 40 55 Synth Voice 2 0 41 55 Choral 0 64 55 Analog Voice 0 0 56 Orchestra Hit 0 35 56 Orchestra Hit 2 0 64 56 Impact XG BRASS 0 0 57 Trumpet 0 32 57 Warm Trumpet 0 0 58 Trombone 0 18 58 Trombone 2 0 0 59 Tuba 0 0 60 Muted Trumpet 0 0 61 French Horn 0 6 61 French Horn Solo 0 32 61 French Horn 2 0 37 61 Horn Orchestra 0 0 62 Brass Section 0 35 62 Trumpet & Trombone Section 0 0 63 Synth Brass 1 0 20 63 Resonant Synth Brass 0 0 64 Synth Brass 2 0 18 64 Soft Brass 0 41 64 Choir Brass XG REED 0 0 65 Soprano Sax 0 0 66 Alto Sax 0 40 66 Sax Section 0 0 67 Tenor Sax 0 40 67 Breathy Tenor Sax 0 0 68 Baritone Sax 0 0 69 Oboe 0 0 70 English Horn 0 0 71 Bassoon 0 0 72 Clarinet XG PIPE 0 0 73 Piccolo 0 0 74 Flute 0 0 75 Recorder 0 0 76 Pan Flute 0 0 77 Blown Bottle 0 0 78 Shakuhachi 0 0 79 Whistle 0 0 80 Ocarina XG SYNTH LEAD 0 0 81 Square Lead 0 6 81 Square Lead 2 0 8 81 LM Square 0 18 81 Hollow 0 19 81 Shroud 0 64 81 Mellow Voice List Voice No. 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 65 81 Solo Sine 0 66 81 Sine Lead 0 0 82 Sawtooth Lead 0 6 82 Sawtooth Lead 2 0 8 82 Thick Sawtooth 0 18 82 Dynamic Sawtooth 0 19 82 Digital Sawtooth 0 20 82 Big Lead 0 96 82 Sequenced Analog 0 0 83 Calliope Lead 0 65 83 Pure Lead 0 0 84 Chiff Lead 0 0 85 Charang Lead 0 64 85 Distorted Lead 0 0 86 Voice Lead 0 0 87 Fifths Lead 0 35 87 Big Five 0 0 88 Bass & Lead 0 16 88 Big & Low 0 64 88 Fat & Perky 0 65 88 Soft Whirl XG SYNTH PAD 0 0 89 New Age Pad 0 64 89 Fantasy 0 0 90 Warm Pad 0 0 91 Poly Synth Pad 0 0 92 Choir Pad 0 66 92 Itopia 0 0 93 Bowed Pad 0 0 94 Metallic Pad 0 0 95 Halo Pad 0 0 96 Sweep Pad XG SYNTH EFFECTS 0 0 97 Rain 0 65 97 African Wind 0 66 97 Carib 0 0 98 Sound Track 0 27 98 Prologue 0 0 99 Crystal 0 12 99 Synth Drum Comp 0 14 99 Popcorn 0 18 99 Tiny Bells 0 35 99 Round Glockenspiel 0 40 99 Glockenspiel Chimes 0 41 99 Clear Bells 0 42 99 Chorus Bells 0 65 99 Soft Crystal 0 70 99 Air Bells 0 71 99 Bell Harp 0 72 99 Gamelimba 0 0 100 Atmosphere 0 18 100 Warm Atmosphere 0 19 100 Hollow Release 0 40 100 Nylon Electric Piano 0 64 100 Nylon Harp 0 65 100 Harp Vox 0 66 100 Atmosphere Pad 0 0 101 Brightness 0 0 102 Goblins 0 64 102 Goblins Synth 0 65 102 Creeper 0 67 102 Ritual 0 68 102 To Heaven 0 70 102 Night 0 71 102 Glisten 0 96 102 Bell Choir 0 0 103 Echoes 0 0 104 Sci-Fi XG WORLD 0 32 105 Detuned Sitar 0 35 105 Sitar 2 0 97 105 Tamboura 0 0 106 Banjo Voice No. 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 MIDI Bank Select Program Voice Name MSB LSB Change# (0–127) (0–127) (1–128) 0 28 106 Muted Banjo 0 96 106 Rabab 0 97 106 Gopichant 0 96 108 Taisho-kin 0 97 108 Kanoon XG PERCUSSIVE 0 0 113 Tinkle Bell 0 96 113 Bonang 0 97 113 Altair 0 98 113 Gamelan Gongs 0 99 113 Stereo Gamelan Gongs 0 100 113 Rama Cymbal 0 0 114 Agogo 0 0 115 Steel Drums 0 97 115 Glass Percussion 0 98 115 Thai Bells 0 0 116 Woodblock 0 96 116 Castanets 0 0 117 Taiko Drum 0 96 117 Gran Cassa 0 0 118 Melodic Tom 0 64 118 Melodic Tom 2 0 65 118 Real Tom 0 66 118 Rock Tom 0 0 119 Synth Drum 0 64 119 Analog Tom 0 65 119 Electronic Percussion 0 0 120 Reverse Cymbal XG SOUND EFFECTS 64 0 1 Cutting Noise 64 0 2 Cutting Noise 2 64 0 4 String Slap 64 0 17 Flute Key Click 64 0 33 Shower 64 0 34 Thunder 64 0 35 Wind 64 0 36 Stream 64 0 37 Bubble 64 0 38 Feed 64 0 49 Dog 64 0 50 Horse 64 0 51 Bird Tweet 2 64 0 56 Maou 64 0 65 Phone Call 64 0 66 Door Squeak 64 0 67 Door Slam 64 0 68 Scratch Cut 64 0 69 Scratch Split 64 0 70 Wind Chime 64 0 71 Telephone Ring 2 64 0 81 Car Engine Ignition 64 0 82 Car Tires Squeal 64 0 83 Car Passing 64 0 84 Car Crash 64 0 85 Siren 64 0 86 Train 64 0 87 Jet Plane 64 0 88 Starship 64 0 89 Burst 64 0 90 Roller Coaster 64 0 91 Submarine 64 0 97 Laugh 64 0 98 Scream 64 0 99 Punch 64 0 100 Heartbeat 64 0 101 Footsteps 64 0 113 Machine Gun 64 0 114 Laser Gun 64 0 115 Explosion 64 0 116 Firework The voice number with an asterisk (*) is XGlite optional voice. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 61 Drum Kit List •“ ” indicates that the drum sound is the same as “Standard Kit 1”. • Each percussion voice uses one note. • The MIDI Note # and Note are actually one octave lower than keyboard Note # and Note. For example, in “141: Standard Kit 1”, the “Seq Click H” (Note# 36/Note C1) corresponds to (Note# 24/Note C0). • Key Off: Keys marked “O” stop sounding the instant they are released. • Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously. (They are designed to be played alternately with each other.) C1 C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 F#1 G1 G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 D#2 F#2 G2 G#2 A2 B2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 D#3 F#3 G3 G#3 A3 B3 C4 A#3 C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 F#4 G4 G#4 A4 B4 C5 A#4 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 F#5 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 62 A#5 Voice No. MSB (0–127) / LSB (0–127) / PC (1–128) Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Off Group Note# Note Note# Note 25 C# 0 13 C# -1 3 26 D 0 14 D -1 3 27 D# 0 15 D# -1 28 E 0 16 E -1 29 F 0 17 F -1 4 30 F# 0 18 F# -1 4 31 G 0 19 G -1 32 G# 0 20 G# -1 33 A 0 21 A -1 34 A# 0 22 A# -1 35 B 0 23 B -1 36 C 1 24 C 0 37 C# 1 25 C# 0 38 D 1 26 D 0 O 39 D# 1 27 D# 0 40 E 1 28 E 0 O 41 F 1 29 F 0 O 42 F# 1 30 F# 0 43 G 1 31 G 0 44 G# 1 32 G# 0 45 A 1 33 A 0 46 A# 1 34 A# 0 47 B 1 35 B 0 48 C 2 36 C 1 49 C# 2 37 C# 1 50 D 2 38 D 1 51 D# 2 39 D# 1 52 E 2 40 E 1 53 F 2 41 F 1 54 F# 2 42 F# 1 1 55 G 2 43 G 1 56 G# 2 44 G# 1 1 57 A 2 45 A 1 58 A# 2 46 A# 1 1 59 B 2 47 B 1 60 C 3 48 C 2 61 C# 3 49 C# 2 62 D 3 50 D 2 63 D# 3 51 D# 2 64 E 3 52 E 2 65 F 3 53 F 2 66 F# 3 54 F# 2 67 G 3 55 G 2 68 G# 3 56 G# 2 69 A 3 57 A 2 70 A# 3 58 A# 2 71 B 3 59 B 2 72 C 4 60 C 3 73 C# 4 61 C# 3 74 D 4 62 D 3 75 D# 4 63 D# 3 76 E 4 64 E 3 77 F 4 65 F 3 78 F# 4 66 F# 3 79 G 4 67 G 3 80 G# 4 68 G# 3 81 A 4 69 A 3 82 A# 4 70 A# 3 83 B 4 71 B 3 O 84 C 5 72 C 4 O 85 C# 5 73 C# 4 86 D 5 74 D 4 O 87 D# 5 75 D# 4 88 E 5 76 E 4 89 F 5 77 F 4 90 F# 5 78 F# 4 91 G 5 79 G 4 92 G# 5 80 G# 4 2 93 A 5 81 A 4 2 94 A# 5 82 A# 4 95 B 5 83 B 4 96 C 6 84 C 5 97 C# 6 85 C# 5 98 D 6 86 D 5 99 D# 6 87 D# 5 100 E 6 88 E 5 101 F 6 89 F 5 102 F# 6 90 F# 5 103 G 6 91 G 5 141 127/000/001 142 127/000/002 143 127/000/009 144 127/000/017 145 127/000/025 146 127/000/026 Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit Surdo Mute Surdo Open Hi Q Whip Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Finger Snap Click Noise Metronome Click Metronome Bell Seq Click L Seq Click H Brush Tap Brush Swirl Brush Slap Brush Tap Swirl Snare Roll Castanet Snare H Soft Sticks Bass Drum Soft Open Rim Shot Bass Drum Hard Bass Drum Side Stick Snare M Hand Clap Snare H Hard Floor Tom L Hi-Hat Closed Floor Tom H Hi-Hat Pedal Low Tom Hi-Hat Open Mid Tom L Mid Tom H Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Cymbal Cup Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibraslap Ride Cymbal 2 Bongo H Bongo L Conga H Mute Conga H Open Conga L Timbale H Timbale L Agogo H Agogo L Cabasa Maracas Samba Whistle H Samba Whistle L Guiro Short Guiro Long Claves Wood Block H Wood Block L Cuica Mute Cuica Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Snare H Soft 2 SD Rock H Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal Hi Q 2 Snare L Hi Q 2 SD Rock H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H Bass Drum H BD Rock BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog L BD Analog H Analog Side Stick Analog Snare 1 Open Rim Shot 2 Bass Drum 2 Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock L SD Rock L Snare H Hard 2 SD Room H Room Tom 1 SD Rock Rim Rock Tom 1 SD Rock H E Tom 1 Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Room Tom 4 Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 4 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 4 E Tom 5 Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Snare 2 Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 1 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 2 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 Analog Cowbell Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L Analog Maracas Analog Claves Scratch Push Scratch Pull Scratch Push Scratch Pull Drum Kit List C1 147 127/000/113 148 127/000/033 149 127/000/041 150 127/000/049 Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit Alternate Group 122 126/000/128 StdKit1 + Chinese Perc. 151 126/000/001 152 126/000/002 153 126/000/113 SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2 Sound Effect Kit C#1 D1 E1 F1 D#1 Reverse Cymbal F#1 G1 Hi Q 2 AnSD Snappy Drum Loop SD Jazz H Light Brush Slap L G#1 A1 B1 C2 A#1 C#2 D2 E2 F2 F#2 G#2 A2 C3 A#2 C#3 D3 E3 F3 Bass Drum L BD Jazz BD Jazz Gran Cassa Gran Cassa Mute SD Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Sn M SD Jazz M Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tap Brush Tom 1 Marching Sn H Jazz Tom 1 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 4 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 4 Jazz Tom 5 Hand Cym. L Jazz Tom 6 Hand Cym.Short L Cutting Noise Cutting Noise 2 String Slap D#2 G2 B2 AnBD Dance-1 AnSD OpenRim AnBD Dance-2 AnBD Dance-3 Analog Side Stick AnSD Q AnSD Ana+Acoustic Analog Tom 1 Analog HH Closed 3 Analog Tom 2 Analog HH Closed 4 Analog Tom 3 Analog HH Open 2 Analog Tom 4 Analog Tom 5 Analog Cymbal Analog Tom 6 D#3 Flute Key Click F#3 G3 G#3 Analog Cowbell Hand Cym. H A3 B3 C4 A#3 Hand Cym.Short H C#4 D4 E4 F4 D#4 Analog Conga H Analog Conga M Analog Conga L G#4 A#4 Analog Maracas 4 5 4 5 6 C#5 D5 E5 F5 D#5 Analog Claves 6 F#5 Scratch Push Scratch Pull 7 G5 G#5 A5 B5 C6 A#5 Heartbeat Footsteps Door Squeak Door Slam Applause Camera Horn Hiccup Cuckoo Clock Stream Frog Rooster Dog Cat Owl Horse Gallop Horse Neigh Cow Lion Scratch Yo! Go! Get up! Whoow! Huuaah! A4 C5 Car Engine Ignition Car Tires Squeal Car Passing Car Crash Siren Train Jet Plane Starship Burst Roller Coaster Submarine F#4 G4 B4 Phone Call Door Squeak Door Slam Scratch Cut Scratch Wind Chime Telephone Ring 2 7 Dagu Mute Zhongcha Mute Dagu Heavy Zhongcha Open Paigu Middle Paigu Low Xiaocha Mute Bangu Xiaocha Open Bangzi Muyu Low Zhongluo Mute Muyu Mid-Low Zhongluo Open Muyu Middle Xiaoluo Open Triangle Mute Triangle Open Shower Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Feed Laugh Scream Punch Heartbeat Footsteps Uh!+Hit Dog Horse Bird Tweet 2 Machine Gun Laser Gun Explosion Firework Applause 1 Applause 2 Applause 3 Applause 4 Maou PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 63 Style List Style No. Style Name Style No. 8 BEAT Style No. Style Name 094 Learning4/4 001 8BeatModern 048 Soul 095 Learning6/8 002 60’sGtrPop 049 DetroitPop 096 Fun 3/4 003 8BeatAdria 050 6/8Soul 097 Fun 4/4 004 60’s8Beat 051 CrocoTwist 005 8Beat 052 Rock&Roll 098 Stride 006 OffBeat 053 ComboBoogie 099 PianoSwing 007 60’sRock 054 6/8Blues 100 PianoBoogie 008 HardRock COUNTRY 101 Arpeggio 009 RockShuffle 055 CountryPop 102 Habanera 010 8BeatRock 056 CountrySwing 103 SlowRock 16 BEAT 057 Country2/4 104 8BeatPianoBallad 011 16Beat 058 Bluegrass 105 6/8PianoMarch 012 PopShuffle LATIN 106 PianoWaltz 013 GuitarPop 059 BrazilianSamba 014 16BtUptempo 060 BossaNova 015 KoolShuffle 061 Forro 016 HipHopLight 062 Tijuana BALLAD 063 Mambo 017 PianoBallad 064 Salsa 018 LoveSong 065 Beguine 019 6/8ModernEP 066 Reggae 020 6/8SlowRock 021 OrganBallad 067 VienneseWaltz 022 PopBallad 068 EnglishWaltz 023 16BeatBallad 069 Slowfox DANCE 070 Foxtrot 024 EuroTrance 071 Quickstep 025 Ibiza 072 Tango 026 SwingHouse 073 Pasodoble 027 Clubdance 074 Samba 028 ClubLatin 075 ChaChaCha 029 Garage1 076 Rumba 030 Garage2 077 031 TechnoParty 032 UKPop 078 USMarch 033 HipHopGroove 079 6/8March 034 HipShuffle 080 GermanMarch 035 HipHopPop 081 PolkaPop DISCO 082 OberPolka 036 70’sDisco 083 Tarantella 037 LatinDisco 084 Showtune 038 SaturdayNight 085 ChristmasSwing DiscoHands 086 ChristmasWaltz SWING & JAZZ 087 ScottishReel SwingWaltz 039 64 Style Name R&B BALLROOM Jive TRAD & WORLD 040 BigBandFast 041 BigBandBallad 088 042 JazzClub 089 JazzWaltz 043 Swing1 090 CountryWaltz 044 Swing2 091 OberWalzer 045 Five/Four 092 Musette 046 Dixieland 047 Ragtime 093 Learning2/4 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual WALTZ CHILDREN PIANIST Music Database List MDB No. MDB Name MDB No. POP MDB Name SWING & JAZZ MDB No. MDB Name 92 CielPari GrndClok 1 AlvFever 47 ChooChoo 93 2 DayPdise 48 HighMoon 94 JinglBel 3 GoMyWay 49 InMood 95 MickMrch 4 HowDeep! 50 MistySax 96 Showbiz 5 HurryLuv 51 MoonLit 97 StarMrch 6 Imagine 52 New York 98 WashPost 7 JustCall 53 SaintMch 99 XmasWalz 8 SultanSw 54 ShearJz 100 YankDood 9 WhitePle 55 TstHoney 10 YesterPf 56 ROCK USPatrol EASY LISTENING 11 JumpRock 57 Close2U 12 PickUpPc 58 Entrtain 13 RdRiverR 59 LuvStory 14 SatsfyGt 60 MyPrince 15 Sheriff 61 PupetStr 16 SmokeWtr 62 Raindrop 17 TwistAgn 63 R'ticGtr 18 VenusPop 64 SingRain DANCE 65 SmallWld 19 2 of Us 66 SpkSoft 20 B Leave 67 StrangeN 21 Back St 68 TimeGoes 22 Crockett 69 WhteXmas 23 FunkyTwn 70 WishStar 24 KillSoft 71 WondrWld 25 Nine PM 26 SingBack 72 BambaLa 27 StrandD 73 BeHappy! BALLAD LATIN 74 CopaLola 75 DayNight Ipanema 28 AdelineB 29 CatMemry 76 30 ElvGhett 77 MuchoTrp 31 Feeling 78 Sunshine 32 Mn Rivr 79 Tico Org 33 OnMyMnd 80 TrbWave 34 OverRbow 35 ReleseMe 81 BoxerFlt 36 SavingLv 82 CntryRds 37 SmokyEye 83 Jambala 38 WhisprSx 84 TopWorld R&B 85 YlwRose COUNTRY BALLROOM 39 AmazingG 40 BoogiePf 86 BrazilBr 41 Clock Rk 87 CherryTp 42 CU later 88 DanubeWv 43 HappyDay 89 TangoAc 44 RisingSn 90 45 ShookUp 46 TeddyBer Tea4Two TRADITIONAL 91 CampRace PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 65 Song List Song No. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 Song Name Top Picks Demo 1 (Yamaha Original) Demo 2 (Yamaha Original) Demo 3 (Yamaha Original) Learn to Play Für Elise (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Für Elise (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Basic) (Traditional) Twinkle Twinkle Little Star (Advanced) (Traditional) Turkish March (Basic) (W.A. Mozart) Turkish March (Advanced) (W.A. Mozart) Ode to Joy (Basic) (L. v. Beethoven) Ode to Joy (Advanced) (L. v. Beethoven) The Entertainer (Basic) (S. Joplin) The Entertainer (Advanced) (S. Joplin) Londonderry Air (Basic) (Traditional) Londonderry Air (Advanced) (Traditional) The Last Rose of Summer (Basic) (Traditional) The Last Rose of Summer (Advanced) (Traditional) Amazing Grace (Basic) (Traditional) Amazing Grace (Advanced) (Traditional) Favorite Frère Jacques (Traditional) Der Froschgesang (Traditional) Aura Lee (Traditional) London Bridge (Traditional) Sur le pont d'Avignon (Traditional) Nedelka (Traditional) Aloha Oe (Q. Liliuokalani) Sippin’ Cider Through a Straw (Traditional) Old Folks at Home (S. C. Foster) Bury Me Not on the Lone Prairie (Traditional) Cielito Lindo (Traditional) Santa Lucia (A. Longo) If You’re Happy and You Know It (Traditional) Beautiful Dreamer (S. C. Foster) Greensleeves (Traditional) Kalinka (Traditional) Holdilia Cook (Traditional) Ring de Banjo (S. C. Foster) La Cucaracha (Traditional) Funiculi Funicula (L. Denza) Largo (from the New World) (A. Dvořák) Brahms’ Lullaby (J. Brahms) Liebesträume Nr.3 (F. Liszt) Pomp and Circumstance (E. Elgar) Chanson du Toreador (G. Bizet) Jupiter, the Bringer of Jollity (G. Holst) The Polovetsian Dances (A. Borodin) Die Moldau (B. Smetana) Salut d'Amour op.12 (E. Elgar) Humoresques (A. Dvořák) Symphony No.9 (from the New World - 4th movement) (A. Dvořák) Song No. 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 Song Name Favorite with Style O du lieber Augustin (Traditional) Mary Had a Little Lamb (Traditional) When Irish Eyes Are Smiling (E. R. Ball) Little Brown Jug (Traditional) Ten Little Indians (Traditional) On Top of Old Smoky (Traditional) My Darling Clementine (Traditional) Oh! Susanna (S. C. Foster) Red River Valley (Traditional) Turkey in the Straw (Traditional) Muffin Man (R. A. King) Pop Goes the Weasel (Traditional) Grandfather’s Clock (H. C. Work) Camptown Races (S. C. Foster) When the Saints Go Marching In (Traditional) Yankee Doodle (Traditional) Battle Hymn of the Republic (Traditional) I’ve Been Working on the Railroad (Traditional) American Patrol (F. W. Meacham) Down by the Riverside (Traditional) Instrument Master Sicilienne/Fauré (G. Fauré) Swan Lake (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Grand March (Aida) (G. Verdi) Serenade for Strings in C major, op.48 (P. I. Tchaikovsky) Pizzicato Polka (J. Strauss II) Romance de Amor (Traditional) Menuett BWV. Anh.114 (J. S. Bach) Ave Verum Corpus (W. A. Mozart) Radetzky Marsch (J. Strauss I) Piano Repertoire Wenn ich ein Vöglein wär (Traditional) Die Lorelei (F. Silcher) Home Sweet Home (H. R. Bishop) Scarborough Fair (Traditional) My Old Kentucky Home (Traditional) Loch Lomond (Traditional) Silent Night (F. Gruber) Deck the Halls (Traditional) O Christmas Tree (Traditional) Sonata Pathétique 2nd Adagio Cantabile (L. v. Beethoven) Ave Maria/J. S. Bach - Gounod (J. S. Bach / C. F. Gounod) Jesus bleibet meine Freude (J. S. Bach) Prelude op.28-15 “Raindrop” (F. Chopin) Nocturne op.9-2 (F. Chopin) Etude op.10-3 “Chanson de L'adieu” (F. Chopin) Romanze (Serenade K.525) (W. A. Mozart) Arabesque (J. F. Burgmüller) La Chevaleresque (J. F. Burgmüller) Für Elise (L. v. Beethoven) Turkish March (W.A. Mozart) 24 Preludes op.28-7 (F. Chopin) Annie Laurie (Traditional) Jeanie with the Light Brown Hair (S. C. Foster) • Some songs have been edited for length or for ease in learning, and may not be exactly the same as the original. • A song book (free downloadable scores) is available that includes scores for all internal songs (excepting Songs 1–3). To obtain the Song Book, complete the user registration at the following website. https://member.yamaha.com/myproduct/regist/ 66 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Effect Type List Harmony Types No. 01 Harmony Type Duet 02 Trio 03 Block Description If you want to sound one of the harmony types 01–05, play keys to the right side of the Split Point while playing chords in the left side of the keyboard after turning Auto Accompaniment on. One, two or three notes of harmony are automatically added to the note you play. When playing back a Song that includes chord data, harmony is applied whichever keys are played. 04 Country 05 Octave 06 Trill 1/4 note 07 Trill 1/6 note 08 Trill 1/8 note 09 Trill 1/12 note 10 Trill 1/16 note 11 Trill 1/24 note 12 Trill 1/32 note 13 Tremolo 1/4 note 14 Tremolo 1/6 note 15 Tremolo 1/8 note 16 Tremolo 1/12 note 17 Tremolo 1/16 note 18 Tremolo 1/24 note 19 Tremolo 1/32 note 20 Echo 1/4 note 21 Echo 1/6 note 22 Echo 1/8 note 23 Echo 1/12 note 24 Echo 1/16 note 25 Echo 1/24 note 26 Echo 1/32 note If you keep holding down two different notes, the notes alternate (in a trill) continuously. If you keep holding down a single note, the note is repeated continuously. (The repeat speed differs depending on the selected type.) If you keep holding down a note, echo is applied to the note played. (The echo speed differs depending on the selected type.) Reverb Types No. 01–03 Reverb Type Description Hall 1–3 Concert hall reverb. 04–05 Room 1–2 Small room reverb. 06–07 Stage 1–2 Reverb for solo instruments. 08–09 Plate 1–2 Simulated steel plate reverb. Off No effect. 10 Chorus Types No. Chorus Type Description 01–02 Chorus 1–2 03–04 Flanger 1–2 This produces a rich, animated wavering effect in the sound. Off No effect. 05 Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing. PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 67 Specifications Size/Weight Keyboard Display Panel Voices Dimensions Weight Number of Keys Touch Response Type Backlit Language Language Tone Generation Polyphony Preset Compatibility Types Effects Function Preset Accompaniment Styles Tone Generating Technology Number of Polyphony (Max.) Number of Voices Reverb Chorus Ultra-Wide Stereo Harmony Dual Split Panel Sustain Number of Preset Styles Fingering Style Control Custom Other Features Preset Songs WxDxH Recording Compatible Data Format User Styles Music Database One Touch Setting (OTS) Number of Preset Songs Number of Songs Number of Tracks Data Capacity Recording Function Playback Recording Lesson Functions Storage and Connectivity Amplifiers and Speakers Overall Controls Miscellaneous Internal Memory Connectivity Amplifiers Speakers Metronome Tempo Range Transpose Tuning Portable Grand Button Power Supply Power Supply Power Consumption Auto Power Off Function Included Accessories 945 x 369 x 132 mm (37-3/16” x 14-1/2” x 5-3/16”) 4.9kg (10 Ibs. 13 oz.) (not including batteries) 61 Yes LCD display Yes English English AWM Stereo Sampling 32 140 panel voices + 13 drum/SFX kits + 344 XGlite voices GM/XGlite 9 types 4 types 3 types 26 types Yes Yes Yes 106 Multi fingering ACMP ON/OFF, SYNC START, START/STOP, INTRO/ENDING/rit., MAIN/AUTO FILL Yes 100 Yes 102 5 2 Approx. 10,000 notes (when only “melody” tracks are recorded) Approx. 5,500 chords (when only “chord” tracks are recorded) Yes SMF Original File Format [1 LISTENING, 2 TIMING, 3 WAITING], [KEYS TO SUCCESS], [PHRASE REPEAT], [CHORD DICTIONARY], [A-B REPEAT] Yes 11 – 280 -12 – 0 – +12 427.0 - 440.0 - 453.0 Hz Yes 1.7MB PHONES/OUTPUT, DC IN, USB TO HOST, SUSTAIN 2.5W + 2.5W 12cm x 2 • Adaptor: Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent • Batteries:Six “AA” size, LR6 or equivalent batteries 7W (When using PA-130 power adaptor) Yes • Music Rest • Owner’s Manual • My Yamaha Product User Registration • AC Power adaptor* (PA-130 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha) * May not be included depending on your particular area. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. Optional Accessories • Adaptor: Users within U.S or Europe: PA-130 or an equivalent Others: PA-3C, PA-130 or an equivalent • Footswitch: FC4/FC5 • Keyboard Stand: L-2C/L-2L • Headphones: HPE-150/HPE-30 * Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 68 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual Index A H A-B Repeat ..................................................................34 ACMP ON/OFF ..........................................................19 Auto Accompaniment ................................................19 Auto accompaniment range .......................................19 Auto Power Off .......................................................9, 43 Harmony ..................................................................... 16 Harmony Type List .................................................... 67 Harmony Volume ....................................................... 42 Headphones .................................................................. 9 B Backup ................................................................... 40, 45 Backup File .................................................................45 Battery ........................................................................... 8 Beat Display ................................................................ 13 BGM Playback ...........................................................26 C Chord ...........................................................................21 Chord Dictionary ........................................................22 Chord Display .............................................................13 Chorus ................................................................... 17, 42 Chorus Send Level (Main, Dual and Split) ..............42 Chorus Type List ........................................................67 Computer .....................................................................44 I Initial Send .................................................................. 43 Initialization ................................................................ 40 Intro ............................................................................. 20 K KEYS TO SUCCESS ................................................ 28 L Left .............................................................................. 32 Lesson ......................................................................... 28 Lesson Track R/L for transferred songs ............. 43, 46 Listening ..................................................................... 31 Local ............................................................................ 42 M D DC IN ............................................................................8 Delete (File) ................................................................ 40 Delete (User Song) ..................................................... 39 Demo ...........................................................................26 Display ........................................................................13 Drum Kit .....................................................................14 Drum Kit List .............................................................. 62 Dual .............................................................................17 E Effect Type List ..........................................................67 Ending ......................................................................... 20 External Clock ............................................................42 F FF .................................................................................27 Footswitch (Sustain jack) ............................................9 Function .......................................................................41 Function Setting List ............................................41–43 G Grade ...........................................................................32 Main/Auto fill ............................................................. 20 Master EQ ..................................................................... 9 Master EQ Type ......................................................... 42 Master Volume Control ............................................... 9 Measure ....................................................................... 13 Melody Voice .............................................................. 27 Metronome .................................................................. 35 Metronome Volume ................................................... 43 MIDI ............................................................................ 42 Music Database .......................................................... 24 Music Rest .................................................................... 6 Musicsoft Downloader ............................................... 45 Mute ............................................................................ 34 N Notation ...................................................................... 13 O Octave (Main/Dual/Split) .......................................... 42 One Touch Setting (OTS) .......................................... 14 Option .......................................................................... 68 P part ............................................................................... 32 Passing Status ....................................................... 13, 30 Pause ........................................................................... 27 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 69 Index PC setting ....................................................................43 PHONES/OUTPUT .....................................................9 Phrase ..........................................................................33 Phrase Repeat .............................................................. 33 PORTABLE GRAND ................................................15 Power Adaptor ..............................................................8 Press and Hold for a while .........................................11 Tuning ......................................................................... 41 R V Recording ..............................................................36–38 Reverb ....................................................................17, 42 Reverb Level ...............................................................42 Reverb Type List .........................................................67 Rew ..............................................................................27 Rhythm ..................................................................12, 18 Right ............................................................................32 rit.(ritardando) .............................................................20 Root .......................................................................21–22 Voice ...................................................................... 12, 14 Voice List .................................................................... 58 Volume (Main Voice/Dual Voice/Split Voice) ......... 42 Volume (Song) ............................................................ 41 Volume (Style) ............................................................ 41 Ultra-Wide Stereo ...................................................... 15 USB ....................................................................... 10, 44 User Song .................................................................... 36 W Waiting ........................................................................ 31 X S Save data to computer ................................................45 Section ......................................................................... 20 SMF Format ................................................................ 45 Song .......................................................................12, 25 Song Book ...............................................................6, 48 Song List .....................................................................66 Song Volume ...............................................................41 Split ..............................................................................17 Split Point ..............................................................19, 41 START/STOP .............................................................12 Step ..............................................................................28 Style .......................................................................12, 18 Style File .....................................................................46 Style List .....................................................................64 Style Volume ...............................................................41 Supplied Accessories .............................................6, 68 Sustain (Footswitch) .....................................................9 Sustain (Panel) ......................................................17, 42 Synchro Start .............................................................. 19 T Tempo ..........................................................................35 TEMPO/TAP .............................................................. 35 Time Signature ......................................................35, 43 Timing ......................................................................... 31 Touch Response ..........................................................15 Touch sensitivity .........................................................41 Track ................................................................13, 34, 37 Track Rec ..............................................................37–38 Transfer .......................................................................45 Transpose ....................................................................41 70 U PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual XGlite ............................................................................ 6 Memo PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 71 Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples): This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved. (weee_battery_eu_en) OBSERVERA! Apparaten kopplas inte ur växelströmskällan (nätet) så länge som den ar ansluten till vägguttaget, även om själva apparaten har stängts av. ADVARSEL: Netspændingen til dette apparat er IKKE afbrudt, sålænge netledningen sidder i en stikkontakt, som er tændt — også selvom der er slukket på apparatets afbryder. VAROITUS: Laitteen toisiopiiriin kytketty käyttökytkin ei irroita koko laitetta verkosta. (standby) Entsorgung leerer Batterien (nur innerhalb Deutschlands) Leisten Sie einen Beitrag zum Umweltschutz. Verbrauchte Batterien oder Akkumulatoren dürfen nicht in den Hausmüll. Sie können bei einer Sammelstelle für Altbatterien bzw. Sondermüll abgegeben werden. Informieren Sie sich bei Ihrer Kommune. (battery) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Keyboard Model Name : PSR-E333/YPT-330 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (FCC DoC) FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. 72 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. (class B) PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual 73 74 PSR-E333/YPT-330 Owner’s Manual For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para obter detalhes de produtos, entre em contato com o representante mais próximo da Yamaha ou com o distribuidor autorizado relacionado a seguir. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Подробные сведения об инструменте можно получить у местного представителя корпорации Yamaha или уполномоченного дистрибьютора, указанного в следующем списке. THE NETHERLANDS/ BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG FRANCE Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 ITALY CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA SPAIN/PORTUGAL MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Joaquim Floriano, 913 - 4' andar, Itaim Bibi, CEP 04534-013 Sao Paulo, SP. BRAZIL Tel: 011-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte Madero Este-C1107CEK Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 011-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 ASIA Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 Yamaha Música Ibérica, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 EUROPE Yamaha Music U.K. Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Switzerland in Zürich Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 CZECH REPUBLIC/SLOVAKIA/ HUNGARY/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-602039025 POLAND/LITHUANIA/LATVIA/ESTONIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Sp.z o.o. Oddzial w Polsce ul. 17 Stycznia 56, PL-02-146 Warszawa, Poland Tel: 022-500-2925 Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 INDIA Yamaha Music India Pvt. Ltd. 5F Ambience Corporate Tower Ambience Mall Complex Ambience Island, NH-8, Gurgaon-122001, Haryana, India Tel: 0124-466-5551 INDONESIA GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 147 Skiathou Street, 112-55 Athens, Greece Tel: 01-228 2160 SWEDEN PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 021-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1, Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, 9F, Dongsung Bldg. 158-9 Samsung-Dong, Kangnam-Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3467-3300 DENMARK YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 6A, DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 03-78030900 PHILIPPINES Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1, N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120, IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) Room 37, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: 495 626 5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 6747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 4, 6, 15 and 16th floor, Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2622 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LOB 16-513, P.O.Box 17328, Jubel Ali, Dubai, United Arab Emirates Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Works LTD P.O.BOX 6246 Wellesley, Auckland 4680, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Sales & Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Digital Musical Instruments Division EKB54 Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-3273 Yamaha Global Home http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division © 2011 Yamaha Corporation 012POTY*.*-01A0 Printed in China WW13050